JP7095302B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, a gaming effect is executed as the game progresses (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, as the game effect, there are those in which various effects are executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device in the game machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-116279

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing a player's motivation to play by increasing the degree of attention, interest and understanding of the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a predetermined gaming area of a game board provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an image display means for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern is variablely displayed, and the predetermined game machine. A detection means that is in a predetermined detection state when a predetermined object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the game area, a movable member that is displaced between the first position and the second position, and the movable member. A gaming machine comprising a displacement means for displacing an object and an effect executing means for causing the image display means to execute a game effect in the progress of the game, wherein the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position. In the case where the detection means can be in the predetermined detection state, and the effect executing means is a predetermined displacement in which the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the displacement means. In addition, a first effect executing means capable of executing the corresponding first effect before the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the predetermined area in the predetermined area during a predetermined game period. The game machine includes a second effect executing means for executing a second effect when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means, and the game machine includes a determination means for determining the remaining time of the first effect. If the determination means determines that the remaining time of the first effect is longer than the predetermined time while the first effect is being executed, the predetermined game period is not generated and the remaining time of the first effect is equal to or less than the predetermined time. When it is determined by the determination means, the predetermined game period can be generated after the first effect is executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention, interest and understanding of a game and improving the player's motivation to play .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the 1st accessory of 1st Embodiment is lowered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first accessory, and (b) is a diagram showing the schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor. It is a figure which shows the detection range of the touch sensor of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor of 1st Embodiment, and the 1st accessory, (a) shows the case where the 1st accessory is at the origin position, and (b) is the 1st accessory. Shows the case where is at the maximum point position. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a top view which shows the operation button of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of each counter used for the internal lottery of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the winning / failing table which stored the value of the random number which wins the big hit occurrence of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of the jackpot type of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table of 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for the start opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game times control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the display duration of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the data structure stored in the ROM of 1st Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the data structure stored in ROM 93, (b) is a figure which shows the data structure which is stored in a common ROM 96. be. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the structure of the register 952 provided in the sound output LSI of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game result of 1st Embodiment, a game state and the like. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation notice part of the notice display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing which generates the notice display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side notice display execution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the notice display generation processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display side notice display execution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display side accessory drive processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the one-announcement right-and-behind table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the accessory drive generation processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol of 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example of the mode transition effect which is executed when it corresponds to the "most advantageous result" in the normal state of 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example in the big hit time (opening and closing execution mode) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect type (effect type) selection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in the other example of the effect type (effect type) selection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the staging MA of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the staging MB of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the staging MC of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side notice display execution processing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution processing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern of the modification of 1st to 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the 1st accessory of the 4th embodiment is lowered. It is a figure which shows the operation notice part of the notice display of each operation position of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution processing of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the 1st accessory of the modification of 4th Embodiment is lowered. It is a figure which shows the operation notice part of the notice display of each operation position of the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern of the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor of 5th Embodiment, and the 1st accessory, (a) shows the case where the 1st accessory is at the origin position, and (b) is the 1st accessory. Shows the case where is at the maximum point position. It is a figure which shows the operation notice part of the notice display of each operation position of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side notice display execution processing of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the touch sensor detection process of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution processing of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor of the modification of 5th Embodiment, and the 1st accessory, (a) shows the case where the 1st accessory is at the origin position, and (b) is the 1st. 1 The case where the accessory is at the maximum point position is shown. It is a figure explaining the data used for the transition processing to the production of the 4th mode M4 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the staging MA of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the staging MB of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the staging MC of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure for performing the execution control of the effect of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the register of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the sequence data of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the sound light ROM of 7th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Next, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As the gaming machine, a general pachinko machine will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, "left", "right", "top", and "bottom" refer to a state in which the gaming machine is viewed from the front (player side). Further, for "front" and "rear", the side facing the player is referred to as "front", and the side far from the player is referred to as "rear".

<Pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine 10) according to the first embodiment has a rectangular outer frame 11 forming an outer shell and is rotatable forward with respect to the outer frame 11. It is provided with the attached gaming machine main body 12.

The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame formed in a rectangular frame shape that opens in the front-rear direction and is installed in a vertical position on an installation frame stand (not shown) of a game store. The gaming machine main body 12 has an inner frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 toward the front side (player side) and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame toward the front side (player side). The door frame 13 is provided with a back pack unit (not shown) rotatably supported on the inner frame to the rear side (the side opposite to the player), and a locking device 14. A prepaid card type ball lending device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided on the left side of the outer frame 11.

The inner frame (not shown) is supported by one of the right side portion or the left side portion of the outer frame 11 with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side. The front door frame 13 is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the inner frame with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side. The back pack unit is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the inner frame with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side. The locking device 14 is provided at the lower part of the right side or the left side of the gaming machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. 1), and has a function of making the gaming machine main body 12 unable to open with respect to the outer frame and an inner frame of the front door frame. It has a function to make it impossible to open. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the locking device 14 is a cylinder lock. In the first embodiment, when the key is inserted and then rotated to the right, the function of disabling the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame is released, and when the key is rotated to the left, the front door frame 13 is moved to the inner frame. The function that makes it impossible to open is canceled.

The front door frame 13 is provided so as to cover the front side of the inner frame, and is made of an elliptical window portion 21 that opens in the thickness direction, a transparent glass plate fitted into the window portion 21, a synthetic resin material, or the like. It has a window panel 22 formed.

Further, the front door frame 13 has an indicator lamp device 23 as a light emitting means arranged on the upper part of the window portion 21, and audio outputs arranged on the upper left and right sides and the lower left side of the gaming machine main body 12. It has a speaker unit 24 as a means and a navigation means. The indicator lamp device 23 has a light emitting body (not shown) such as a light bulb in which a light emitting element such as an LED (light emitting diode), a filament, or a discharge element is enclosed in a glass spherical shell. Further, the speaker unit 24 can output voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, the display lamp device 23 is turned on / blinks in accordance with the symbol variation effect of the symbol display device 51, which will be described later (light emission effect), or the sound or sound effect is output from the speaker unit 24 (voice effect). The lamp device 23 and the speaker unit 24 are configured to function as an effect executing means.

Further, the front door frame 13 has an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 that bulge toward the front side (player side) on the lower side of the window portion 21. The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper bulging portion 25 is provided inside so as to open upward, and has an upper saucer 251 that serves as a saucer for storing game balls. Further, the lower bulging portion 26 has a lower saucer 261 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a saucer for storing the game ball. The upper saucer 251 is configured such that the bottom surface is gently inclined from the left side to the right side and is tapered on the right side portion, and the game ball launching mechanism 81 is arranged while storing the stored game balls one by one. It has a function to lead to.

When the game ball becomes surplus in the upper tray 251 the game ball is discharged to the lower tray 261. That is, the lower saucer 261 has a function of storing the game balls surplus in the upper saucer 251. Further, the lower bulging portion 26 is provided with a lever that can slide in the left-right direction, and the game ball stored in the lower tray 261 is moved to the lower portion of the lower tray 261 by the player sliding the lever. It is configured to be discharged from. In the first embodiment, the upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are integrally molded with the front door frame 13 at the lower position of the front door frame 13 to open and close the front door frame 13. At the same time, the upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are also configured to open and close.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a firing handle 27 as a launching means at a lower right position of the gaming machine main body 12. The launch handle 27 is urged counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated by the player rotating the launch handle 27 clockwise (clockwise) to move up. The game balls stored in the saucer 251 are fired one by one toward the game area 31R (see FIG. 2) of the game board 31. In the first embodiment, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching mechanism 81 is performed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). Further, in the first embodiment, the number of game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls per minute.

The launch handle 27 is configured so that the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 81 changes according to the amount of rotation thereof, and as the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (clockwise). The hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 81 gradually increases, and the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 81 gradually decreases as the player rotates the firing handle 27 counterclockwise (counterclockwise). It is configured. That is, as the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (clockwise), the arrival position of the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 on the game board 31 shifts from the left side to the right side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the launch handle 27 is provided with a contact sensor 271 for detecting that the player is touching the handle and a launch stop switch 272 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball. .. The launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 81 is performed when the launch handle 27 is rotated and the contact sensor 271 is on and the launch stop switch 272 is off, and the contact sensor 271 is off or the launch stop switch 272 is off. If is on, the game ball will not be fired.

Further, an operation button 28 as an operation means is provided on the upper surface of the upper bulge portion 25. The operation button 28 is used when selecting an effect type (effect type), and the player can select and confirm the effect type by operating the operation button 28. As shown in FIG. 9, the operation buttons 28 include a decision button 281 arranged in the center, a left direction button 282 arranged on the left side of the decision button 281, and a right direction button 283 arranged on the right side of the decision button 281. And have. When selecting the effect type, the player presses the left direction button 282 and the right direction button 283 to select the effect type, and presses the decision button 281 arranged in the center to determine the effect type (the effect type is determined. Can be confirmed).

Further, the operation button 28 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the symbol display device 51 or changing the effect content of the super reach. Here, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the symbol display device 51 are unified, and the ball enters the first start port 36 or the second start port 37 shown in FIG. Various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that accompany the start-up start prize) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "coastal stage" with a coastal motif, a "personal stage" with a human motif, an "underwater stage" with an underwater motif, and the like are prepared as stages. The stage change is performed when the operation button 28 is operated by the player during a period during which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.
Further, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 25, a ball lending button (not shown) for instructing lending of a game ball within the range of the value balance (valuable balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit and a CR unit are provided. A return button (not shown) is provided to instruct the return of the inserted card.

<Game board 31>
The game board 31 is a substantially rectangular plate member made of a veneer material or a synthetic resin material. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has a guide portion 34 (hereinafter referred to as a guide portion 34) composed of two rails (inner rail 32 and outer rail 33) provided on the front surface (player side) and curved in a substantially circular shape. It also has a guide rail). The guide rail 34 has a function of guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 to the upper left portion of the game board 31. The player operates the launch handle 27 to launch the game ball into the substantially circular game area 31R defined by the guide rail 34, thereby playing the game. Further, at the end of the guide rail 34, a return portion 31a is provided so that the game ball launched into the game area 31R does not return to the inside of the guide rail 34. The game ball driven into the game area 31R is detected by a driving ball detection sensor (not shown) provided in the back pack unit (not shown), and the ball detection signal of the driving ball detection sensor is a hole. It is configured to be output to a computer (not shown). In the first embodiment, the driving ball detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit, but it may be provided in another place, for example, the game board 31.

Further, the game board 31 is subjected to router processing, so that a plurality of large and small openings (not shown) penetrating in the plate thickness direction are formed at appropriate positions. Further, each opening of the game board 31 is provided with a first starting port 36, a second starting port 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39. The position and number of openings formed in the game area 31R of the game board 31 can be appropriately changed as needed. The game board 31 is provided with through gates 41 on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion. A main display device 42 is provided at a position of the game board 31 that can be visually recognized by the player. A variable display unit 43 is provided at the center of the game board 31. The game board 31 is provided with a large number of game nails 44 in the game area 31R.

In the first embodiment, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area 31R after passing through the opening but also the game after passing through the opening. It also includes an embodiment in which the flow of the game area 31R is continued without being discharged from the area 31R. Further, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means that after passing through the gate provided in the game area 31R, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a entry in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

<Starting winning opening>
As shown in FIG. 2, the first starting port 36 and the second starting port 37 are arranged in a vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting port 36 located on the upper side is a constantly open type winning opening that always opens upward in the game area 31R. Further, on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 37 located on the lower side, an electric accessory (so-called electric tulip (electric tulip)) composed of a pair of opening / closing members 371 configured to open / close the second starting port 37. Is provided. An electric accessory driving unit 372 as a driving means is connected to the pair of opening / closing members 371, and the pair of opening / closing members 371 closes the second starting port 37 as the electric accessory driving unit 372 is driven. It is configured to be displaced between the position and the open position. In the first embodiment, a pair of opening / closing members 371 for opening / closing the second starting port 37 are arranged on the left and right side portions sandwiching the second starting port 37, and the pair of opening / closing members 371 are driven by the electric accessory driving unit 372. Are driven so that their mutual positions are close to each other and separated from each other.

That is, in the first embodiment, the first starting port 36 is configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area 31R can always win a prize with a certain probability, and the second starting port 37 drives the electric accessory driving unit 372. By doing so, the winning probability of the game ball is configured to be variable. Here, in a state where the opening / closing members 371 provided on both the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting port 37 are displaced to the closed position (hereinafter, the electric service closed state), the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37 is prevented. Therefore, the probability that the game ball will win the second starting port 37 is lower than the probability that the game ball will win the first starting port 36. Further, in the state where the opening / closing member 371 is displaced to the open position (hereinafter, the electric service open state), the game ball received by the opening / closing member 371 is guided to the second starting port 37 and the game is played to the first starting port 36. The probability that the game ball will win the second starting port 37 is higher than the probability that the ball will win.

In addition, in the electric accessory, instead of the above-mentioned electric service closed state and electric service open state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 37 (unlike the electric service closed state, the game ball can be entered. It may be configured to switch between a state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 37.

<Variable winning device>
As shown in FIG. 2, the variable winning device 38 opens and closes in a rectangular plate shape that allows the special winning opening 381 (hereinafter referred to as the large winning opening) as a special winning means to open in the game area 31R to be opened and closed. A door (opening / closing member, opening / closing means) 382 is provided, and the opening / closing door 382 is configured to be displaced between a closed state and an open state when the variable winning drive unit 383 as a driving means is driven. In the first embodiment, the opening / closing door 382 swings in the front-rear direction to open / close the special winning opening. In FIG. 2, the opening / closing door 382 closes the large winning opening 381. Is shown.

In the first embodiment, the opening / closing door 382 is set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal state. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 382 is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize. The open / close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the open / close door 382 is set to the open state and the game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 381. Further, in the first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing door 382 in one round game is set from the opening / closing door 382 to the closed state again. The number of times of opening and closing is arbitrary. For example, the opening / closing door 382 may be opened / closed a plurality of times (twice or more) in one round game, and in this case, the opening / closing state and the closing state of the opening / closing door 382 are set a plurality of times in one round game. It will be.

The player maximizes the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and moves the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side of the opposite side. By shifting (so-called right-handed), the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

<Detection sensor>
The game board 31 has detection sensors 502 to 504 that detect the entry of a game ball in the vicinity of various winning openings of the first starting opening 36, the second starting opening 37, and the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38. (See FIG. 8). Further, these detection sensors 502 to 504 are arranged on the back side of the game board 31, the detection sensor 502 detects the entry of the game ball into the first start port 36, and the detection sensor 503 detects the entry of the game ball into the second start port 37. The detection sensor 504 detects the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38. The detection sensors 502 to 504 are wired and connected to the main control board 61 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the detection sensors 502 to 504 detect the game ball (first start port 36, second start port). A predetermined number of prize balls (game balls obtained by winning) are paid out in the wake of the winning of the game balls to the various winning openings of the large winning openings 381 of the variable winning apparatus 38 and the variable winning apparatus 38.

In the first embodiment, when the detection sensor 502 detects that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the first starting port 36, the pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls and the detection sensor 503 enters the second starting port 37. When a ball is detected, two prize balls are paid out, and when the detection sensor 504 detects that the variable winning device 38 has entered the large winning opening 381, 13 prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to various winning openings is not limited to these, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the first starting port 36 may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 37. Further, a plurality of (two or more) variable winning devices 38 are provided in the game area 31R of the game board 31, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is different for each winning to the large winning opening 381 of the plurality of variable winning devices 38. Also, for example, when two variable winning devices 38 are provided, the number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the large winning opening 381 of each variable winning device 38 may be 13 and 14, respectively.

The out port 39 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 31R of the game board 31, and the game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area 31R through the out port 39. The out port 39 is arranged on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a detection sensor 505 that detects the entry of the game ball (see FIG. 8).

Further, each through gate 41 is arranged on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a detection sensor 506 for detecting the entry of the game ball (see FIG. 8). The detection sensors 505 and 506 are wired and connected to the main control board 61 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 has an out port unlike the case where a ball enters various winning openings. If a ball enters 39 and each through gate 41, the prize ball will not be paid out.

It should be noted that each detection sensor 502 to 506 may be capable of individually detecting the entry of a game ball into various winning openings, and for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor, a transmissive photo sensor, or the like can be used.

<Design display>
The main display device 42 has a main display unit 46, a display unit 47 for accessories, and a round display unit 48, and has a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display unit, and the like. It is configured by arranging multiple display devices. The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof, and can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. ing. Further, the distance (gap) between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball flows down in the gap between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22, that is, in front of the main display device 42.

<Main display unit 46>
The main display unit 46 is performed based on the first result display unit 461 for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first starting port 36 and the winning of the second starting port 37. A second result display unit 462 for displaying the result of the internal lottery is provided (see FIG. 8).

<First result display unit 461>
The first result display unit 461 executes the variation display of the symbol triggered by the winning of the first starting port 36, and is performed based on the winning of the first starting port 36 as the stop result of the variation display. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 36, the first result display unit 461 is sequentially turned on and off, and the fluctuating variable display is performed, and finally the first result display unit 461. Multiple types (types) of special symbols are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitively lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 461 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. ..

<Second result display unit 462>
The second result display unit 462 executes the variation display of the symbol triggered by the winning of the second starting port 37, and is performed based on the winning of the second starting port 37 as the stop result of the variation display. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37, the second result display unit 462 is sequentially turned on and off, and the fluctuating variable display is performed, and finally the second result display unit 462 is performed. Multiple types (types) of special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as special symbols) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) in which is definitively lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 462 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. ..

Here, the special figure is a symbol for notifying indicating the result of an internal lottery such as whether or not it is a big hit (specific game), and in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, the lighting position of the LED or the like. It is possible to display multiple types of special figures. Specifically, the special figures that can be displayed on the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 include a plurality of types of special figures as a jackpot display result that can recognize a jackpot, and a deviation that can recognize a deviation. One type of special figure as a display result is set. Then, one special map is determined according to the result of the lottery per special map, and as a stop result of the variable display, the previously determined special map is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462. Will be done.

In the following description, the variation display performed by the first result display unit 461 is referred to as "special figure 1 variation display", and as a result of the special figure 1 variation display, a fixed stop display is displayed on the first result display unit 461. The special figure is also called special figure 1. Similarly, the variation display performed by the second result display unit 462 is referred to as "second special figure variation display", and as a result of the second special map variation display, the special figure displayed on the second result display unit 462 as a definite stop display. Is also referred to as special figure 2.

<Display unit 47 for accessories>
The accessory display unit 47 executes the variable display of the symbol triggered by the winning of each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. Display the result of. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 41, the accessory display unit 47 is sequentially turned on and off, and the blinking and fluctuating variable display is performed, and finally the accessory display unit 47 is displayed. A plurality of types of normal symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as normal symbols) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitively lit. When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 47 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. do. In this electric service open state, the opening / closing member 371 of the electric accessory provided in the second starting port 37 is in the open state.

<Round display unit 48>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot determination is won, one jackpot game is determined from a plurality of types of jackpot games (specific games) described later. A plurality of types of jackpot games having different numbers of rounds are set, and the number of rounds of the winning jackpot game is notified by the round display unit 48. In the first embodiment, two types of "15 times" and "2 times" are set as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds is notified by the lighting pattern of the LED provided in the round display unit 48. In the first embodiment, the round display unit 48 includes two LEDs arranged on the left and right, and by turning on the LED on the left side, it is notified that the number of rounds is "15 times", and the right side. By turning on the LED, it is notified that the number of rounds is "twice".

In the first embodiment, the main display unit 46 and the accessory display unit 47 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as a segment display and a dot display, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. Further, as the symbols to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 46 and the accessory display unit 47, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted. Further, in the first embodiment, the round display unit 48 notifies the number of round games by a light emitting display using an LED, but the number of round games is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, and the like. Other types of display devices such as CRTs and dot matrices may be used to notify the number of round games. The display areas of the main display unit 46, the accessory display unit 47, and the round display unit 48 are set to be extremely smaller than the display areas such as the notification effect described later, which are executed by the symbol display device 51 described later. For a player who is paying attention to various effects performed by the symbol display device 51, each information can be easily displayed in the lighting state of the main display unit 46, the accessory display unit 47, and the round display unit 48. It's hard to recognize.

Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 51 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 52 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 51. The upper portion of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed. Further, the variable display unit 43 is provided with a first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory for the advance notice effect.

<Design display device 51>
The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and is detachably attached to the game board 31 so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 faces the front side (player side) of the game board 31. Has been done. The symbol display device 51 displays a variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a decorative diagram) for staging when a predetermined condition is satisfied (a game ball is won in the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37). Start. That is, when the symbol display device 51 executes variable display on the first result display unit 461 of the main display unit 46 and when the variable display is executed on the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46, the symbol display device 51 is adjusted accordingly. And execute the variable display. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, etc., as well as a drum type symbol display device and a dot matrix type symbol display device. Various conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and variable display of various symbols such as the above can be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display device 51 according to the first embodiment is set with a plurality of symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 capable of variablely displaying decorative drawings, and the first start port 36 or the first start port 36 or the first. With the winning of the 2 starting port 37 as an opportunity, the decorative drawing starts to change in each symbol display row Z1, Z2, Z3. Further, the effective stop positions of the decorative figures are set in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively, and the stop symbols that combine the effective stop positions of the respective symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 by the symbol variation effect are set. The symbol combination of the decorative drawing that is stopped and displayed on the effective line L is derived. In the symbol display device 51 of the first embodiment, three rows of symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set side by side, and a decorative figure is effective for each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3. The stop positions are set one by one, and a symbol variation effect consisting of three rows of decorative drawings is performed. That is, one stop symbol effective line L is set in the symbol display device 51 of the first embodiment. In the following description, the symbol display column Z1, the symbol display column Z2, and the symbol display column Z3 may be referred to in order from the left side.

Further, the display area of the decorative figure in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 51 is composed of a larger area than the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462. The decorative drawing is displayed much larger than the figure. Therefore, the player can visually recognize whether it is a big hit or a miss from the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L of the symbol display device 51.

The symbol display device 51 is configured to perform variation display so that the decorative figure moves along a predetermined variation direction (vertical direction from top to bottom in the first embodiment) at the start of the symbol variation effect. Therefore, the decorative drawings that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at the effective stop positions of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 in a predetermined stop order. Further, the symbol display device 51 temporarily temporarily stops and displays the decorative figure at the effective stop position of each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 before the symbol variation effect is completed, and each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3. By stopping and displaying the decorative drawing of, one symbol variation effect is completed. That is, the symbol variation effect (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is performed from the start of variation to the final stop of the decorative drawing (special figure 1 and special figure 2) performed based on one start hold information. It is designed to be executed once.

Here, the "variable display" is a state in which the decorative drawings displayed at the effective stop positions in the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changed in a predetermined order. Further, the "fixed stop" of the decorative drawing means that the decorative drawing continues at the effective stop position in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 for a predetermined special figure fluctuation interval time (for example, 600 ms (milliseconds)). It is the state where the stop is displayed. Further, the "temporary stop" of the decorative drawing is a state in which the decorative drawing displayed so as to stay at the effective stop position in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 is not continuously stopped during the special figure fluctuation interval time. Is. That is, the temporary stop of the decorative drawing includes a state in which the decorative drawing is displayed in a fluctuating state at the effective stop position and a state in which the decorative drawing is stopped and displayed in a time shorter than the special drawing fluctuation interval time.

Further, in the first result display unit 461 and the symbol display device 51, the symbol variation effect related to the special figure 1 variation display and the special figure 1 variation display is started, and the special figure 1 and the decorative drawing are fixedly stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the second result display unit 462 and the symbol display device 51, the second special figure variation display and the symbol variation effect related to the second special figure variation display are started, and the special figure 2 and the decorative figure are fixedly stopped and displayed. To. In addition, the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 do not simultaneously perform the special figure variation display, and the special figure variation is performed on either the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462. When the display is performed, the other special figure variation display is not performed.

Here, in the symbol display device 51 according to the first embodiment, ten kinds of numbers "0" to "9" are set as basic decorative figures in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3. The decorative drawings are displayed in a variable manner in order in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3. The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 51 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scroll direction of each symbol column, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, the symbol of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers. In addition, the decorative drawing may be given a first identification symbol that the player can definitely recognize that the probability change state (described later) is given after the jackpot game ends, and a probability change state after the jackpot game ends. It is classified as a second identification symbol that can be uncertainly recognized as having.

Here, as the first identification symbol, a special decorative drawing other than the basic decorative drawing may be used even if it is appropriately set from the basic decorative drawings. For example, the odd-numbered symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" and the even-numbered symbols of "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" are the first. The identification symbol of "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" can be used as the second identification symbol. In this way, the player can decorate each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 which is fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop position (stop symbol effective line L) of each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 in the symbol display device 51. It is possible to grasp whether or not the winning game is given by the figure. In the first embodiment, as a winning symbol combination, a symbol combination (for example, "1 ・ 1 ・ 1", "2 ・ 2 ・ 2") in which the same decorative figure is fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop position of each symbol display column is displayed. Etc.) are set.

The symbol combination of the decorative figure that can recognize this jackpot becomes the hit display result, and the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is given after the symbol variation effect is completed. On the other hand, if even one of the symbols in all the rows displayed at the effective stop position of the symbol display device 51 is different, the symbol combination is, in principle, "off" in which the jackpot game is not given. Can be recognized. The pattern combination of the decorative drawing that can recognize this deviation is the deviation display result.

Further, the symbol display device 51 displays a symbol combination of decorative drawings according to the displayed special map as a result of the special map variation display on the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462. That is, the special figure displayed on the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462 and the symbol combination of the decorative figure displayed on the symbol display device 51 correspond to each other, and when the symbol variation effect is completed. , The special figure is fixedly stopped in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, and the decorative figure is fixedly stopped and displayed in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 51. ing. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make one-to-one combination of decorative symbols for special symbols, and one special symbol may be associated with a plurality of decorative symbol combinations.

The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp unit 53 provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 51, a second holding lamp unit 54 provided in the lower center area of the symbol display device 51, and a symbol display. It includes a third holding lamp unit 55 provided in the lower right area of the device 51, and a touch sensor 57 provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 51.

<Hold lamp>
The first holding lamp unit 53 includes an LED that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the first starting port 36, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holdings of the game balls. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can hold up to four gaming balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the first holding lamp unit 53 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the first hold lamp unit 53 corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 461 and the symbol display device 51. That is, the number of holdings displayed by the first holding lamp unit 53 is added by 1 when the game ball wins the first starting port 36, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display of the first result display unit 461 is performed. To.

The second holding lamp unit 54 includes an LED that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the second starting port 37, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holdings of the game balls. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can hold up to four gaming balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the second holding lamp unit 54 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second hold lamp unit 54 corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 462 and the symbol display device 51. That is, the number of holdings displayed by the second holding lamp unit 54 is added by 1 when the game ball wins the second starting port 37, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display of the second result display unit 462 is performed. To.

The third holding lamp unit 55 includes an LED that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in each through gate 41, and the LED lights up according to the number of holdings of the game balls. The third holding lamp unit 55 can hold up to four gaming balls in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the third holding lamp unit 55 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second holding lamp unit 54 corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 47. That is, the number of holdings displayed by the third holding lamp unit 55 is added by 1 when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 41, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the accessory display unit 47 is performed. ..

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to notify the number of reserved game balls by turning on the LEDs of the holding lamp units 53 to 55, but the symbol display device 51 is used as an image. , The first starting port 36, the second starting port 37, and each through gate 41 may have other configurations such as notifying the reserved number of winning game balls. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of LEDs provided in each of the holding lamp units 53 to 55 is four corresponding to the maximum holding number 4, but for example, two LEDs are arranged side by side. When the number of holds is "1" to "2", the LED is "lit" in order from the left or right, and when the number of holds is "3" to "4", the number of holds is "blinking" in order from the left or right. May be notified to the player.

FIG. 4 shows a state in which the first accessory 310 is lowered so as to cover a part of the upper side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. The first accessory 310 is, for example, an accessory used for an effect suggesting an expectation to be a big hit in a variable effect currently being performed, and the expectation to be a big hit depends on the operation mode of the first accessory 310. It is configured to be recognizable to the player. In the present embodiment, as one aspect (one notification) of this advance notice effect, an image that emphasizes the movement and light emission of the first accessory 310 is displayed on the display screen G while operating and emitting light of the first accessory 310. By doing so, there is an aspect of notifying the player that the game will be a big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the display screen G is set to display a school of fish or bubbles in conjunction with or independently of the operation / light emission of the first accessory 310, and it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". Also provides an embodiment in which the result of the notice display is determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed. The player can raise the expectation of a big hit by seeing the advance notice effect performed during the variable effect.

In the pachinko machine 10, a variation effect with a short variation time to a variation effect with a long variation time are prepared. Normally, the longer the variation time, the higher the probability of a big hit. For this reason, in order to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit, the variable effect with a longer variation time is configured so that the advance notice effect is executed more often. In addition, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is long, the player may be bored until the stop display is displayed. However, by executing a large number of advance notice effects, the risk of such a player being bored is reduced. can do. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and to make the player continue to play the game.

The first accessory 310 is a disk-shaped movable accessory in the front view of the game area 31R, and is used for a notice effect (for example, one notification). The first accessory 310 is at the origin position as an initial position in a normal state, and is stored above the center frame 52 when the game area 31R is viewed from the front. Then, for example, when the variation effect of the decorative symbol performed by the symbol display device 51 becomes a big hit, the first accessory 310 is placed in the center frame 52 at an arbitrary timing while the variation effect is being performed. Down from. Then, by rotating the first accessory 310 clockwise (clockwise) in the game area 31R near the position where the first accessory 310 is lowered to the maximum point position, the player rotates the first accessory 310. A notice effect (one-shot notification effect) is performed in which the character 310 is visually recognized and a notice is given that the variable effect will be a big hit. In the present embodiment, the first accessory 310 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in the game area 31R, but the first accessory 310 is rotated in one direction and then in the opposite direction. Alternatively, this operation may be repeated.

In addition, an LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first accessory 310, and the advance notice effect is further emphasized by turning on or blinking the LED in conjunction with the operation of the first accessory 310. It is configured to be. Further, the display of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is controlled so that the brightness around the first accessory 310 becomes higher in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 310. As a result, the advance notice effect by the first accessory 310 is further emphasized. Further, in the variable effect of 1, before the one-shot notification effect by the first accessory 310 is performed, the one-shot notification effect is performed while the first accessory 310 is moved up and down according to the operation of the touch sensor 57 by the player. The first character 310 also performs a one-shot notification chance production that gives the player a sense of expectation that the above will be performed.

The one-shot notification chance effect is randomly generated by an internal lottery during the variable effect, and the timing of occurrence is also random. If the first accessory 310 is out of alignment in the variable effect in which the one-shot notification chance effect is performed, the first accessory 310 is placed at a predetermined position (maximum) from the initial position (the position stored inside the upper side of the center frame 52 (also referred to as the origin position)). It moves up and down from the point position to the position set on the origin position side), and after a predetermined time elapses, the one notification chance ends, and the first accessory 310 returns to the initial position (origin position). ..

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the variable production in which the one-shot notification chance production is performed, the first character 310 reaches the predetermined position only a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 5 times) determined in advance by lottery. Then, the first accessory 310 descends to the maximum point position and executes a one-shot notification effect.
As a result, by moving the first accessory 310 up and down, it is possible to raise the expectation that a one-shot notification effect that promises a big hit will be performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. .. Further, since the one-shot notification chance production is performed by moving the first accessory 310 up and down according to the operation status of the touch sensor 57 by the player, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game. The game can be continued without making the player bored.

It should be noted that the display control device 100 described later, which controls the display of the symbol display device 51, determines whether or not to perform the advance notice effect (one-shot notification effect, one-shot notification chance effect, etc.) using the first accessory 310. .. This is because the display control device 100 determines the detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variation effect executed by the symbol display device 51 including the advance notice effect. In other words, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice effect using the first accessory 310 according to the detailed fluctuation pattern determined by the display control device 100.

When the display control device 100 decides to perform the advance notice effect using the first accessory 310, the operation mode of the first accessory 310 determined to be used in the advance notice effect is included to that effect. Is notified from the display control device 100 to the voice emission control device 90 as a command to start the operation of the accessory.

Next, the configuration of the first accessory 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 5A. The first accessory 310 adopts a rack-and-opinion method as a configuration for moving the first accessory 310 up and down, and has a first accessory vertical movement motor 310a, a drive gear 310b which is a gear, and a driven gear. It has a 310c and a slide gear 310d. Further, although not shown, a first accessory rotation motor (not shown) for rotating the first accessory 310 is also provided. When the motor for rotating the first accessory is driven, the first accessory 310 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in the game area 31R.

The first accessory vertical movement motor 310a is, for example, a stepping motor, which is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the drive gear 310b at a predetermined step angle. The driven gear 310c is meshed with the drive gear 310b and is driven to rotate by the rotational force of the drive gear 310b. In addition, a DC motor with an encoder that detects the amount of rotation may be used instead of the stepping motor. The drive mechanism of the first accessory 310 can be configured at a lower cost than the stepping motor.

The slide gear 310d is a flat plate-shaped rod with teeth cut, and is tooth-engaged to the driven gear 310c so that it can reciprocate in the vertical direction as the driven gear 310c rotates. The first accessory 310 is connected to the lower end of the slide gear 310d. Therefore, by driving and rotating the drive gear 310b in step units by the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a, the slide gear 310d moves in the vertical direction in step units via the driven gear 310c. , The first accessory 310 can be moved up and down in the range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 310 is at the origin position, the first accessory 310 is maximized when the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a is driven by 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 310 descends. Reach the point position.

The drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor (not shown) is performed by the voice emission control device 90. The details of the drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor will be described later.

A protrusion 310f is provided at the upper end of the slide gear 310d. Further, the origin detection sensor 311 is provided at the position of the protrusion 310f of the slide gear 310d when the first accessory 310 is at the origin position. Further, the maximum point detection sensor 312 is provided at the position of the protrusion 310f of the slide gear 310d when the first accessory 310 is at the maximum point position.

Next, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 311. Since the maximum point detection sensor 312 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 311, the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 311 includes a light emitting element mounting portion 311a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element mounting portion 311b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, and one end of the light emitting element mounting portion 311a. It is a U-shaped sensor composed of a connecting portion 311c that connects one end of the light receiving element mounting portion 311b so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are arranged so as to face each other at a distance of a predetermined distance. The detection groove 311d is formed by the portion 311a, the light receiving element mounting portion 311b, and the connecting portion 311c.

When there is no insert in the detection groove 311d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 311a is directly received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 311b. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 311d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 311a is blocked, and the light is received by the light receiving element mounted on the light receiving element mounting portion 311b. Can not. The origin detection sensor 311 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an on signal when it does not receive light, so that in the voice emission control device 90 that receives the signal, something is sent to the detection groove 311d. It can be determined whether or not the insert (projection 310f) has been inserted.

In this origin detection sensor 311, the light emitting element mounting portion 311a is arranged on the front side in front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 311b is arranged on the rear surface side in front view, the connecting portion 311c is arranged on the left side in front view, and the first accessory 310 is at the origin position. The protrusion 310f of the slide gear 310d is inserted into the detection groove 311d so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 311 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the origin detection sensor 311 outputs an on signal so that the voice emission control device 90 can be used. It can be determined that the first accessory 310 has reached the origin position.

Further, the maximum point detection sensor 312 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 311, the first accessory 310 is at the maximum point position, and the protrusion 310f of the slide gear 310d is inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 312. When inserted, it is attached so as to block the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 312 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the maximum point detection sensor 312 outputs an on signal to control the voice emission control device. 90 can determine that the first accessory 310 has reached the maximum point position.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a detection range of the touch sensor 57. The touch sensor 57 is an operation means for receiving an input by being operated by the player, and as shown in FIG. 6, the central region of the symbol display device 51 is set as the detection range AR1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range AR1 set to widen from the area below the symbol display device 51 toward the area on the upper right. By providing the touch sensor 57 so that the diagonal line of the symbol display device 51 and the center line (axis line) of the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 coincide with each other in this way, one touch sensor is wider than the symbol display device 51. The range can be covered. Then, the touch sensor 57 can detect the player's hand (object) when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR1. Here, the touch sensor 57 employs an optical method, and the action of the player holding his / her hand within the detection range AR1 can be detected through the window panel 22.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor 57 and the first accessory 310. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the origin position and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 do not overlap in a plan view. In other words, the position of the first accessory 310 is a position that is not detected by the touch sensor 57.
Further, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the maximum point position and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57. In the example shown in FIG. 7B, the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 overlap each other in a plan view. In other words, the position of the first accessory 310 is the position detected by the touch sensor 57.
In the following description, as shown in FIG. 7A, the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 do not overlap in a plan view, and the first accessory 310 is connected by the touch sensor 57. The state in which it is not detected is also called the first state. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 overlap each other in a plan view, and the first accessory 310 is at a position where the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310. The state is also called the second state. In addition to the state shown in FIG. 7B, when the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 overlap in a plan view, the first accessory 310 is moved by the touch sensor 57. Since it is in the detected position (second state), the first accessory 310 is detected by the touch sensor 57.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.
As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100. These devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 supplies necessary electric power to the payout control device 70 and the pachinko machine 10 for executing the payout control for causing the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and also supplies a power source for controlling the game ball launch mechanism 81. -The launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU (Micro-Processing Unit) 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 63 and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 64 constituting the MPU 62. There is. The MPU 62 is a semiconductor element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are integrated into one chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, and is a so-called one-chip microcomputer. be. In the first embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 may be individually chipped. Further, although the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are physically separated separate memories, they may be one memory that is not physically separated, and the ROM 63 area and the RAM 64 area may be provided by a logical address. .. In this case, for example, a specific area in the RAM may be write-protected so that the ROM function may be provided. The same applies to the MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as the main storage device of the MPU 62. The ROM 63 is a non-volatile memory that does not require external power supply for holding stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written. This ROM 63 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, for example, a pass / fail table storage area 631, a distribution table storage area 632, a reach table storage area 633, and variations. It has various areas such as a table storage area 634. These areas will be described in detail later.

The RAM 64 is a semiconductor memory capable of arbitrarily writing and erasing information. The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when reading and executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. It is a volatile memory. This RAM 64 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and for example, various counter areas 641, a hold ball storage area 642, an electric service hold area 643, and a stop result storage. It has various areas such as area 644. These areas will be described in detail later. In the first embodiment, a volatile memory such as DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) or SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) is used as the RAM 64, but the RAM 64 is non-volatile such as MRAM (Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory). Memory may be used.

The MPU 62 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 502 to 506. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 connected to the voice emission control device 90 will be described in detail later. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 372 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 371 of the second starting port 37, a variable winning drive unit 383 that opens / closes the opening / closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 46 and the accessory display unit 47.

Here, the main control board 61 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 372 to open / close the opening / closing member 371. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383 to open / close the opening / closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the starting ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display unit 47 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / emission control device 80. .. The MPU 62 receives electric power (DC24V) via the power failure monitoring board 65. Further, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 502 to 506. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination to the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37.

The payout control device 70 is a prize ball (a game ball obtained by winning a prize) or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player) to the payout device 71 based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. Executes the payout control to make the payout.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes an AC-DC converter that generates operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. The generated operating power is supplied to each device. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 has a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper tray 251 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. When the predetermined firing conditions (when the firing handle 27 is rotated, the contact sensor 271 is on, and the firing stop switch 272 is off) are satisfied, the power supply / firing control device 80 is set to this solenoid. A drive signal (launch permission signal) is supplied to the vehicle to launch the game ball.

In the first embodiment, the game ball launching mechanism 81 of the pachinko machine 10 adopts a method of launching a game ball by a linear expansion / contraction operation of a plunger type solenoid, but it is directly connected to the rotation axis of the rotary solenoid. It may be a form in which a hitting ball is operated to launch a game ball, or a form in which a hitting mallet supported at a different position operates with respect to the rotation of a motor to launch a game ball. Specifically, in the method of launching a game ball by a motor, the motor and the hitting mallet are supported at different positions, and the hitting mallet is operated by rotating the cam connected to the motor. The hitting mallet operated by the motor (cam) hits the game ball by operating in the opposite direction due to the elasticity of the connected spring or the like, and launches it into the game area 31R of the game board 31. Further, in the method of launching the game ball by the rotary solenoid, the game ball is hit by rotating the rotation axis in response to the pulse from the power supply / launch control device 80, and the game ball is moved to the game area 31R of the game board 31. Be fired. The hitting mallet directly connected to the rotation axis of the rotary solenoid hits the game ball on the launch rail by rotating to the support position of the game ball, and the game ball is launched. After hitting the ball, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the hitting mallet rotates in the opposite direction due to the reaction of the collision with the stopper and its own weight, and the stopper stops the ball at the position before the operation. Further, in the method of launching the game ball by the plunger type solenoid, the ball hammer is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger type solenoid, and the game ball is hit by the linear reciprocating operation of the mallet, and the game area 31R of the game board 31 is hit. A game ball is fired. In addition, the plunger type solenoid is a type that launches a hitting mallet by energizing the solenoid, and a type that compresses the spring by retracting the hitting mallet by energizing, and advances the hitting mallet by the elasticity of the spring to hit the game ball. Either may be used.

Further, the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 81 may be either a mechanical type or a magnet type. In the case of the mechanical type, the ball feeding device is operated by using the power of the motor that drives the hitting mallet. In the case of the mechanical type, since the driving source of the hitting mallet and the ball feeding device is the same, the game ball is supplied to the launching rail one by one according to the timing of the hitting ball with a simple structure. Is possible. Further, in the case of the magnet type, the ball feed is operated by an independent solenoid separately from the operation of the hammer, and the ball game balls are supplied one by one onto the launch rail. The magnet type is preferably adopted when the game ball launching mechanism 81 launches a game ball using a rotary solenoid or a plunger type solenoid.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery. The "internal lottery" is a lottery for whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is won in the start winning opening provided on the game board. As shown in FIG. 10, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate the reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 46 and the symbol display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not to open the opening / closing member 371 of the second starting port 37. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 641 (see FIG. 10) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added (incremented) to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a predetermined maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated periodically (eg, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the timing at which the game ball wins the first start port 36 or the second start port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 (see FIG. 10) provided in the RAM 64 as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 643 (see FIG. 10) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 642 includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in chronological order in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 36. That is, the values acquired earlier are sequentially stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds information in the order of 1st area Ra1 → 2nd area Ra2 → 3rd area Ra3 → 4th area Ra4 when winning the first starting port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession. To store.

In the first embodiment, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit has four storage areas, up to four winning balls to the first starting port 36 are held. ing. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has a storage area for writing the number of holds, which is the number of sets of each value of the hold random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is provided. The number of reserved pieces related to the first starting port 36 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, any one of one to three or five or more.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in chronological order in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37. That is, the values acquired earlier are sequentially stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds information in the order of first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4 when winning the second starting port 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Is stored in chronological order.

In the first embodiment, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit has four storage areas, up to four winning balls to the second starting port 37 are held. ing. Further, the holding area Rb for the second result display unit has a storage area for writing the number of holdings, which is the number of sets of each value of the holding jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is provided. The number of reserved pieces related to the second starting port 37 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, for example, any one of one to three, or five or more.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 461 and 462, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

Since the electric service holding area 643 has four storage areas, up to four game balls can be held for winning in each through gate 41. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes two through gates 41. However, regardless of which through gate 41 is awarded, if one of the through gates 41 is awarded, the electric service holding area is provided. At 643, the winning of the game ball to the through gate 41 is suspended. The number of reserved pieces related to the second starting port 37 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, for example, any one of one to three, or five or more.

<Explanation of each counter>
Next, the details of each counter will be described.

<Electric accessory release counter C4>
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is used as the electric function of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 41. It is stored in the hold area 643. The MPU 62 is a lottery for whether or not to open the opening / closing member 371 of the second starting port 37 based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 643 (electric accessory opening lottery). To execute.

<Support mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as support modes) in which the frequency with which the opening / closing member 371 that allows the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 37 is opened is different from each other. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening / closing member 371 in the open state is relatively low, and a high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening / closing member 371 in the open state is relatively high. And have.

The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory opening lottery (for example, both are 4/5), but the high-frequency support mode is the low-frequency support mode. As compared with the above, when the electric service open state is won, the opening / closing member 371 is set to the open state more often, and the opening time for setting the opening / closing member 371 to the open state is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening / closing member 371 to the closed state during each opening in the one-time electric service opening state is shorter than the opening time per opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is the minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the object display unit 47) is shortened.

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is in a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the first start port 36 than the second start port 37, and in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a second higher probability than the first start port 36. The probability of winning a prize in the starting port 37 is high. Further, when the winning of the second starting port 37 is detected by the detection sensor 503, a predetermined number (for example, two) of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game. You can play with almost no reduction in the number of balls.

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric accessory opening lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reservation times may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reservation time can be easily selected as compared with the low frequency support mode, and the average of the selection time is selected. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening / closing member 371 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the opening / closing member 371 to the open state with the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high. Further, the types of support modes are not limited to two types, and may be arbitrary, and may be, for example, three or more types.

<Random number counter for big hits>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, by using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI, the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed is accidental. A big hit lottery is performed by a plus method determined by a certain value. Specifically, in the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number progresses from the initial value 0 when the power is turned on, and when the count progresses to the maximum value 599, the next value does not become 0 and the random number initial. The value acquired from the value counter CINI is the initial value. Here, assuming that 100 is acquired from the random number initial value counter CINI as the initial value, the jackpot random number counter C1 advances counting to 100, 101, 102, and when counting to 599, returns to 0 and advances counting to 99. , The initial value is acquired again from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, since the initial value is changed every time the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the periodicity does not appear at the timing when a specific random number appears.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 36, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (win / fail lottery) for generating a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the values of random numbers that win the jackpot generation. Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot occurrence is, as shown in FIG. 11, a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 631 of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means. Is remembered as.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / failing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The hit / fail tables are the hit / miss table for the low probability mode (low probability hit / miss information group) shown in FIG. 11A and the hit / miss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 11B (high probability hit / miss information). Group) and. The MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / miss tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

These win / fail tables have the results (win / fail results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit win", "special miss result", and "normal miss result". Specifically, under the gaming state (low probability state) in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 11A, a random number that becomes a “big hit winning”. The value of is two. Further, under the gaming state (high probability state) in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 11B, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is There are 21 pieces. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot winning stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of becoming a "big hit win" than the low probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, other than the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these deviation results are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. .. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 36, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the value of a random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 12, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is distributed in the distribution table storage area 632 (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 12 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 12 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

The first distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the first starting port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 12A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified small round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to small round)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14". (Probability 1/6) is assigned to "Unspecified low round high probability result", "15-19" (Probability 1/6) is assigned to "Explicit small round high probability result", and "20 to 29" (Probability). 1/3) is assigned to the "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the second starting port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 12B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "most advantageous result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability results" and "10 to 29". "(Probability 2/3) is assigned to the" most advantageous result ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. "Unspecified small round high probability result", "Explicit small round high probability result", and "Most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big win" is achieved in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery. The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. .. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 36, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642.

The MPU 62 compares the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 with the reach table when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery. The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is information on the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 633 (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 63.

Here, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 51 stops the same odd number or the same even number. The combination of symbols having is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery and the result is sorted into a "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 51 stops the combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Stop display on the symbol valid line L. Furthermore, if the winning / fail lottery is a "big win" and the lottery is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result", or if the winning / fail lottery is "big hit winning". If the result is a "special deviation result", the symbol display device 51 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal deviation result" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that do not exist is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“Big hit win” in the winning / failing lottery, and “Unspecified small round high probability result” or “Explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being sorted into "probability result" or in the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

The mode of reach display is a specific symbol display column (in the first embodiment, the symbol display column Z1 and the symbol display column Z3) among a plurality of symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. ) Is stopped and displayed on the effective line L of the symbol, and the remaining symbol display column (in the first embodiment, the symbol display column Z2) is displayed in a variable manner (reach display), so that the reach state (reach) is reached. ) Is configured so that the player can recognize that it has occurred. Specifically, the reach display is a combination of symbols in which the same decorative figure is stopped and displayed in the symbol display column Z1 and the symbol display column Z3, for example, "1 ・ ↓ ・ 1", "2 ・ ↓ ・ 2" ("↓"). "" Means that it is changing). Further, the symbols of the specific symbol display columns (symbol display column Z1 and symbol display column Z3) forming the reach display are in the state of temporary stop display, and the remaining symbol display columns (symbol display column Z2) have decorative symbols. After the stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed, the decorative figures in all the symbol display columns are fixedly stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 generates a reach display, and after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51, before displaying a predetermined stop result, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery and sorts. It is possible to expect the player to be assigned to the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" in the lottery. The mode of reach display is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

In the first embodiment, the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 includes the reach random number counter C3, and the MPU 62 has a reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63 and a holding ball storage area. By comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in 642, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed. That is, in the first embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the main control device 60, but the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is performed by the voice emission control device 90. It may be configured to be executed by.

<Expected production>
The pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 51. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / failing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to directing. The above-mentioned reach display is also an expected effect that occurs when the result is a “normal loss result” without being a “big hit” in the winning / failing lottery. It has a kind of expected production. Since the reach display has already been described, the notice display will be described below.

<Notice display>
The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery, or if it becomes a "special loss result" without becoming a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected effect that makes it easier to generate an effect than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate instead of making it easier to generate an effect, or may combine these. In the first embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the main control device 60, while the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is performed by the voice emission control device 90. Is executed at.

In the mode of the advance notice display, among the plurality of symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, all the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, or some of the symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where (for example, the symbol display column Z1) is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L and a plurality of symbol columns (for example, the symbol display columns Z2 and Z3) are variablely displayed, a predetermined character or the like is displayed. It is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done. The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. .. The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 46 and the symbol on the symbol display device 51 based on the comparison between the variation table and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. Determine the display duration. The variable table is information on the value of a random number related to the display duration, and is stored in the variable table storage area 634 (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 63 as described above.

To explain the reach of the present embodiment in more detail, when the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach is won (when the reach is generated), the MPU 62 is the variation type counter CS and the variation stored in the ROM 63. The fluctuation pattern such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is determined by the table. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 determine the reach type of the decorative symbol displayed on the symbol display device 51 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined based on the variation type counter CS and the variation table. Determine the detailed pattern variation mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not to perform reach display on the symbol display device 51 is determined based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a jackpot and a deviation fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a miss are prepared. In addition, as the variation pattern table for deviation, the variation pattern table for deviation and the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) depending on whether the gaming state is a low probability state during normal except during time reduction, or during time reduction or probabilistic change (normal). Probability change) A fluctuation pattern table is prepared.

Here, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area of 1 in the holding ball storage is a random number that becomes a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the same holding area is , Determined from the jackpot variation pattern table.

Further, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold area of 1 in the hold ball storage area 642 is not a random number that is a jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the game state is normal except during the time reduction. When in the low probability state, the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the same holding area as the jackpot random number counter C1 is determined from the off (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and the gaming state is changed. When the time is shortened or the probability change is in progress, the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the same holding area as the jackpot random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table.

FIG. 13A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table stored in the ROM 63. The fluctuation patterns selected in the case of a big hit include various normal reach, various super reach, and various special reach, and among these fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. ) Is selected.

Here, various types of normal reach are fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation time is as short as 15 seconds, and the first symbol (or decorative symbol) is aligned after the short reach (the symbols are aligned at the so-called bitter stop). Various super reach is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 27 to 60 seconds, which is longer than that of normal reach, and is the first symbol (or decoration) after a relatively long reach (for example, a reach that develops from a long reach or a normal reach). It is a fluctuation pattern in which the symbols) are aligned. The various special reach is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 to 127 seconds, which is longer than that of the various super reach, and the reach that takes place for the longest time (for example, the reach that further develops after the super reach or the destination from the normal reach is the super reach. It is a variable pattern in which the first symbol (or decorative symbol) is aligned after a special reach different from that of the above.

In addition, "various reach" means that there are many different effects in each reach. For example, in super reach, a reach that displays a rear image by changing it quickly or a certain character is used. There is a reach that is displayed suddenly, and in addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as one with a notice effect before the start of fluctuation and one with a effect that becomes a big hit due to re-variation.

As shown in FIG. 13 (a), in the jackpot variation pattern table, the gaming state is normal, time saving, or probable change, as in the case of the deviation pattern table (see FIGS. 13 (b) and 13 (c)). The fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is different.

Specifically, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS and each variation pattern (variation time) when the game state is normal is such that the variation type counter CS has 0 to 50 and the variation time of various normal reach. 15 seconds are associated, the variation type counter CS is associated with any of the various possible fluctuation times 27 to 60 seconds for 51 to 179, and the variation type counter CS is special for 180 to 198. Each of the various possible variation times of 90 to 127 seconds is associated with the reach. On the other hand, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and each fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change is that the fluctuation type counter CS has various fluctuation times of normal reach with respect to 0 to 149. 15 seconds are associated with each other, and any of the fluctuation times 27 to 60 seconds that can be taken by various super reach is associated with the variation type counter CS of 150 to 198.

In the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the gaming state is normal, various super reach and special reach with a long variation time are easily selected as variation patterns. , When the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change, various normal reach with a short fluctuation time are easily selected as the fluctuation pattern.

During normal times, the probability of a big hit is low, so various super reach and special reach with long fluctuation times are often selected as fluctuation patterns, so that while various super reach and special reach are being used for variable production. , Can give the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit. On the other hand, during the time reduction or the probability change, the start winning prize is likely to occur at the second starting port 37. Therefore, if many fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are selected during the time reduction or probabilistic change, it takes time until the start of the next fluctuation effect, and the player is in a waiting state, which may cause discomfort to the player. be. Further, the hall manager (game hall manager) is also unfavorable in terms of management because the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 (game machine) is lowered. Therefore, when the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change, it is configured so that various normal reach with a shorter fluctuation time than the normal time can be easily selected, and the next fluctuation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to a person can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13A, various special reach types are not selected when the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change. Details will be described later, but various special reach will not be selected in case of deviation. That is, when the variable effect is performed by the special reach, it means that it is a 100% big hit. Here, during the probabilistic change, the game state is always a big hit for the player, so if the variable effect is performed by the special reach during the probable change, the variable effect ends earlier than the joy of the big hit. Then, the dissatisfaction that I want you to shift to the special game state (big hit state) will be strongly felt. In the pachinko machine 10, the variable effect by the special reach is not performed during the time reduction or the probable change, so that such dissatisfaction of the player can be avoided.

In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same depending on whether the gaming state is during the time reduction or during the probability change. The correspondence between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS may be different. For example, a jackpot variation pattern table may be specified so that various special reach types are selected as variation patterns during the time reduction. Since it is not always guaranteed that the game will be a big hit during the time saving, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game will be a big hit by performing a variable effect by special reach.

Further, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS, it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a big hit or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established, the last. The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is displaced from the front and back, etc.) may be determined by another variable type counter.

FIG. 13B is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation pattern table for deviation (normal) stored in the ROM 63. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table is exclusively for complete disengagement, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, and other than front / rear disengagement reach and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS is associated with each of the divided groups. Has been done. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold area of 1 in the hold ball storage area 642 is not a random number that is a jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the game state is normal except during the time reduction. When in the low probability state, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table.

For complete deviation only, there are a short deviation in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and a long deviation in which the fluctuation time is longer than the short deviation (10 seconds) but the reach is not established. As for the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS and these fluctuation times, the variation type counter CS is associated with a short deviation time of 7 seconds for 0 to 98, and the variation type counter CS is associated with 99 to 198. A variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the long deviation. Also, in common with reach, various normal reach with a short fluctuation time of 15 seconds, various super reach with a fluctuation time of 27 to 60 seconds longer than the normal reach, and 90 fluctuation time with the super reach. There are various special reach with a long time of ~ 127 seconds. As for the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and these fluctuation times, the fluctuation type counter CS is associated with the fluctuation time of various normal reach of 15 seconds with respect to 0 to 149, and the fluctuation type counter CS is 150 to 189. Any of the various possible fluctuation times of 27 to 60 seconds is associated with the super reach, and any of the various possible fluctuation times of 90 to 127 seconds of the special reach is associated with the variation type counter CS of 190 to 198. It is associated.

FIG. 13 (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) stored in the ROM 63. As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the disengagement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, as in the case of the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table. It is referred to when the reach is determined for complete detachment with detachment and long detachment, and reach other than front and rear detachment reach and front and rear detachment, and there are various types of normal reach and various types of super reach. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the above, and the value of the variable type counter CS is associated with each of the divided groups.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold area of 1 in the hold ball storage area 642 is not a random number that is a jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the game state is a time saving state or a high at the time of probability change. When in the stochastic state, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table.

As for the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS and the fluctuation time exclusively for complete deviation, the variation type counter CS is associated with the variation time of 7 seconds with a short deviation from 0 to 190, and the variation type counter CS is associated with 191 to 198. A variation time of 10 seconds is associated with this. Further, as for the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation time in common to the reach, the fluctuation type counter CS is associated with the fluctuation type counter CS from 0 to 190 with the fluctuation time of various normal reach of 15 seconds, and the fluctuation type counter CS is from 191 to 191. Each of the various possible fluctuation times of 27 to 60 seconds of the super reach is associated with 198.

Since the disengagement (probability variation) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is during the time reduction or the probability variation, the start winning prize is likely to occur at the second starting port 37. Therefore, if there are many long deviations during the time reduction or probabilistic change, it takes time to start the next fluctuation display, which gives the player a waiting state and may cause discomfort to the player. There is sex. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the short deviation is configured to be easier to select than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. It can reduce the possibility of causing discomfort to a person. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Further, in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table referred to in the case of deviation, various special reach that can be selected as the variation pattern in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, if a variable effect is performed by special reach, it will be a 100% jackpot. Further, even in the case of a big hit, the special reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern only when the gaming state is normal, and the probability of being selected is low. Therefore, the special reach can be made to feel to the player as a special variation effect, and the player can be greatly delighted when the variation effect by the special reach is performed.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS, but it may be selected by using a plurality of fluctuation type counters in combination (selecting whether or not to display a notice, etc.). Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of reserved balls (for example). In the case of 3 or more if the maximum number is 4, the fluctuation display may be terminated early, so it may be selected by referring to the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table, or the number of reserved balls. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the above.

Further, in the variation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 13 (b) and 13 (c), short deviations and long deviations are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , Short deviation and long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, random numbers are generated by a counter circuit (counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4) which is a random number generation IC, but program control by software (so-called soft random numbers) is performed. ), It is possible to count at extremely high speed. Also, in the case of soft random numbers, it is processed as part of the program control of the game machine, so it is a burden on the software under the limited memory space, but in the case of hard random numbers, the random numbers are generated by the hardware. As a result, it is possible to generate a random number having a count value several times that of the soft random number without imposing a burden on the software.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) in addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, a 2 msec cycle) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 reads the states (detection states) of the plurality of detection sensors 502 to 506, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 502 to 504 provided in the various winning openings of the first starting opening 36, the second starting opening 37, and the large winning opening 381 detect the winning of the game ball, the prize ball A prize ball command for instructing payout is set, and this set command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 transmits a prize ball command instructing the payout of 13 prize balls to the payout control device 70. do.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 506 provided in each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 electrifies the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. It is stored in the combination holding area 643. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for executing variable display of the symbol of the character display unit 47, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 on the character display unit 47. Let me. Based on the command instruction in the MPU 62, the accessory display unit 47 performs a blinking and fluctuating variable display that turns on and off in sequence, and finally the lighting position (stop) in which the accessory display unit 47 is definitively lit. The command is displayed by (result). Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for instructing the lighting of the third hold lamp unit 55, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 55 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 41 is four, and the third hold lamp unit 55 lights up in the same number as the number of hold balls.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the starting port. Hereinafter, the winning process for the starting port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for starting port>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for a starting port. In the winning process for the starting port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 36 based on whether the detection sensor 502 provided in the first starting port 36 has detected the entry of the game ball. Judge whether or not. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 36 (YES), the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit in step S202. The reserved number is set as the first start reserved storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 processes the steps after step S205.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won in the first starting port 36 (NO), in the MPU 62, the detection sensor 503 provided in the second starting port 37 in step S203 is the game ball. Based on whether or not the ball has been detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second starting port 37. When it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting opening 37 (NO), the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the starting opening. Further, when it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 37 (YES), the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. Then, the reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 processes the steps after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is the upper limit value (4 in the first embodiment). Determine if it is less than. When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value (NO), the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the start port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value (YES), the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) in step S206. Update.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 has the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set is stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206 when “3” is set in the first start hold storage number RaN in step S202. 4 Hold information is stored in the area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 has each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206 when “3” is set in the second start hold storage number RbN in step S204. 4 Hold information is stored in the area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for instructing the lighting of the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the starting port. The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 53 or the second hold lamp unit 54 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37 is four. Further, the first holding lamp unit 53 or the second holding lamp unit 54 is lit by the same number (corresponding) as the number of holding lamps.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. The normal process is the main process for advancing the game. In normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run. The "residual time" is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time required for the processing of steps S301 to S309 from the cycle time (4 msec).

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process of transmitting the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 transmits the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Further, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round and a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the effect is produced. If it is determined that the command for the effect is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 62 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes a win / fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and finally causes the main display unit 46 to stop and display the symbol. Make decisions about such information.

In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each gaming state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode. The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round, and starts the game. If it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 3 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 3000 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of executions of the process in step S305, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes a process of executing opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 371 provided in the second starting port 37 (hereinafter referred to as an electric service support process). Specifically, when the MPU 62 executes the electric bonus opening lottery based on the value of the electric bonus opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 643 of the RAM 64 and wins the electric bonus opening lottery. , The opening / closing process of the opening / closing member 371 is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display unit 47 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes launch control for causing the power supply / launch control device 80 to launch a game ball based on the player's rotational operation so that the player rotates the launch handle 27 clockwise (clockwise). Let me. More specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 excites the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) to cause the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Specifically, the larger the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27, the stronger the excitation, so that the firing strength of the game ball becomes stronger. The power supply / launch control device 80 launches a game ball when predetermined launch conditions (when the launch handle 27 is rotated, the contact sensor 271 is on, and the launch stop switch 272 is off) are met. A drive signal is output to the solenoid of the mechanism 81 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. The power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is set (YES), the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has been reached in step S309, that is, from the time when the current normal processing is started. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 msec) has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not been reached (NO), that is, when the cycle time of 4 msec has not elapsed and the remaining time has occurred, in step S310. , The random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached (4 msec, which is the cycle time, has elapsed).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached (YES), that is, when the cycle time of 4 msec has elapsed and the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again. By doing so, the next normal processing is started.

<Main processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG. In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, a waiting time is provided for waiting for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state. Specifically, the MPU 62 waits until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses after the power is turned on.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is a period for prohibiting access to the RAM 64 (hereinafter referred to as a permission prohibition period), has elapsed. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402 until it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed. That is, if it is not determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402, and if it determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, it executes the process of step S403 and subsequent steps.

In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64. In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erasing switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on. When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409. Further, when it is determined in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on (NO), the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S405.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409. Further, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set (YES), the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value (checksum) in step S406. In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value (checksum) stored in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing. If they match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal (NO), that is, when it is determined that the checksum values do not match, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409. Further, the MPU 62 is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408 when it is determined in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal (YES), that is, when it is determined that the checksum values match. Clear the power failure flag.

In the first embodiment, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed by using the checksum, but the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 confirms the consistency of the checksum values. The determination may be made by a method different from the method. For example, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed by writing a keyword in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main processing. You may. Further, the hash value of CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) or MD5 (Hash Function) may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64. The checksum calculation method is very simple. For example, the lower 1 word of the total of each word in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. Therefore, the effectiveness of data confirmation by checksum is lower than that of other error detection codes, but the algorithm is very simple, so it does not burden the MPU 62 even under limited memory space. Can be calculated.

The MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on (YES), in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), or in step S407 that the RAM is determined. If it is determined that the value is not normal (NO), the processing after step S409 is executed. Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erasing switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 even when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initialization command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411. Further, the MPU 62 permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing in step S412. After that, the MPU 62 shifts to the normal processing described with reference to FIG. By receiving the initialization command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed and initializes itself.

<Game times control process>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game rotation control process. In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG. In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 62 ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. That is, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the starting ports 36 and 37 is detected.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following steps. Further, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (NO), in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 46 is in the variable display, that is, whether or not the game is in progress. judge. When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 46 is not in the variable display (NO), the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 46 is in the variable display (YES), the MPU 62 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

In step S503, the MPU 62 recognizes the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less (NO), in step S504, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is used. Executes the data setting process for setting the stored hold information for the digestion of the game times. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 46 and the symbol display device 51 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process. The data setting process in step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

The MPU 62 determines in step S502 whether or not the main display unit 46 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 46 is in the variable display (YES), the game round progress in steps S506 to S509. Execute the processing.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 20) described later has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 46 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed (YES), the MPU 62 executes the variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 finally stops the information (finally stopped at the main display unit 46) stored in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process (see FIG. 20) described later. Specify the information related to the symbol to be displayed). Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 46 so that the symbol corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 46 during the variable display.

Here, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game field or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 46 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing a fraudulent act similar to the case where the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done.

The display area of the main display unit 46 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 is the symbol display column Z1 to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Compared to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 instead of the main display unit 46. The degree of attention to the screen G increases.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process. The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process in step S504 of FIG. 18 will be described in detail. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing. In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG. In step S601, the MPU 62 has a second start hold storage number RbN of "0" or less in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the start port (see FIG. 15) described above. It is determined whether or not it is. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less (YES), the data for the first result display unit (for the first start port 36) of steps S602 to S606. When the setting process is executed and it is determined in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less (NO), it is for the second result display unit of steps S607 to S611 (for the second start port 37). Executes the data setting process of.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and the first start hold stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. The value of the storage number RaN is updated. In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.

In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra2. Shift to area Ra3. That is, in steps S603 and S604, the shift processing of the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, which of the main display unit 46, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, it changes to the first result display unit 461 based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates that the display should be started.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36. It contains information for the device 90 to recognize.

The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first start port 36, that is, the number of first start hold storages stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. As RaN decreases, the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 53 is reduced.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and the second start hold stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. The value of the storage number RbN is updated. In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb2 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.

In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3. That is, in steps S608 and S609, the shift processing of the data stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is executed by the FIFO (First In First Out, FIFO) method.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, it changes to the second result display unit 462 based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates that the display should be started.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 37. It contains information for the device 90 to recognize. The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of reserved game balls winning in the second starting port 37, that is, the second starting reserved storage number RbN stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. As the number of lights decreases, the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 54 is reduced.

As described above, in the data setting process in FIG. 19, for the first result display unit (for the first start port 36) in which the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set for digestion of the game times. ) Data setting processing (S602 to S606) and the second result display unit (for the second start port 37) that sets the hold information stored in the second result display unit reservation area Rb for digestion of game times. It has the data setting processing (S607 to S611) of. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the data for the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the process. When the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the prize of the game ball to the second start port 37, the MPU 62 wins the game ball to the first start port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially used for digesting the game. Set to.

<Variation disclosure processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 of FIG. 18 will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process. In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.

In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S702, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 11A) is stored in the winning / failing table storage area 631 of the ROM 63. Read from. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode (YES), in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 11B) is used as the winning / failing table of the ROM 63. Read from the storage area 631.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 62 has the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and the hit / miss table for the low probability mode read in step S702 or the hit / miss table for the high probability mode read in step S703. The result of the winning / failing lottery (winning / failing result) is determined by comparison with. The winning / failing result is either "big hit winning", "special losing result", or "normal losing result", and the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" regardless of whether the mode is low probability mode or high probability mode. , "Special off result", and "Normal off result".

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a “big hit winning”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the process after step S706 is executed, and when it is determined in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning" (YES). NO), the processing after step S712 is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the MPU 62 determines in step S706 whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, it is shown that the first result display unit 461 based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64 (NO), in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 12 (a)) is ROM 63. Is read from the distribution table storage area 632.

Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, it is shown that the second result display unit 462 based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 37 starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64 (YES), in step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 12B) is ROM 63. Is read from the distribution table storage area 632.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46, and the determined information. That is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 is information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63. To determine. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the low probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that the distribution result is an "unspecified small round high probability result", When the unspecified small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "most advantageous result". If so, set the most favorable result flag. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S716. In the processing of each of the following steps, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result with reference to the presence / absence of the flag set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not a “big hit winning” (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S712 whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a “special missed result”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the process after step S713 is executed, and in step S712 it is determined that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". If (NO), the processing after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 62 determines and determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46. Information, that is, information related to a symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result. In step S714, the MPU 62 sets the special off flag in the RAM 64. In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" by referring to the presence / absence of the special miss flag set in the RAM 64.

In step S715, the MPU 62 normally executes a stop result setting process for the off-result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 of the main display unit 46, and the determination is made. The information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. It should be noted that the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes the display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process in step S716. The process of setting the display duration (display duration) will be described in detail later.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variable command and a type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 16) to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62, and the process will be described in detail later.

The variable command includes information related to the display duration, but does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs. In addition, the type command includes information related to the result of success or failure and information related to the result of distribution. More specifically, the type command includes each information related to the "big hit winning", the "special loss result", and the "normal loss result" as the information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the distribution result, each information related to "low probability result", "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". It is included. In the following description, the result of success or failure and the result of distribution are also collectively referred to as a game result. That is, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 46 to start variable display based on the determination result. Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, variable display is started in the first result display unit 461 based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. It shows that it is made to do.

Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines in step S718 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 causes the first result display unit 461 to start variable display in step S719. Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 462 starts variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. It is shown that. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 causes the second result display unit 462 to start variable display in step S718.

<Display duration setting process>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display duration setting process. In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG. In step S801, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. Further, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 51. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines in step S802 whether the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result".

In step S802, when the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" (YES), the pass / fail result determined in step S704 of FIG. 20 in step S803 is a "normal deviation result". Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure is a "normal result" (YES), in step S804, the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 63 and the reach stored in the reserved ball storage area 642. The reach generation lottery is executed by comparing with the value of the random number counter C3.

In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display is generated in the reach generation lottery in step S804. When the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the reach display is generated (YES), the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 63 in the step S806. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" (NO), and in step S803, it determines that the pass / fail result is not a "normal deviation result". (NO), or when it is determined in step S805 that the reach display does not occur (NO), the reach non-generation display duration table stored in the ROM 63 is referred to in step S807.

In step S808, the MPU 62 determines the display duration after executing the process of step S806 or step S807. Specifically, the MPU 62 is a variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer based on the reach generation display duration table referred to in step S806 or the reach non-generation display duration table referred to in step S807. Determines the display duration corresponding to the value of. Further, the MPU 62 sets the display duration determined in step S807 in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64.

In the first embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 of FIG. 21, the MPU 62 is stored in the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63 and the hold ball storage area 642. A lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is performed by the voice emission control device 90. It may be configured to run.

Here, in the first embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of reserved pieces increases. That is, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the first start port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of hold items related to the first start port 36 increases. Further, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the second start port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of hold items related to the second start port 37 increases. If the prize is won in the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37 in excess of the maximum number of reserved pieces (4 pieces), the prize balls can be paid out, but the big hit lottery cannot be received. However, as in the present embodiment, as the number of holdings increases, the display duration is shortened and the game times are digested faster, so that the maximum value of the number of holdings is exceeded and a prize is won (the prize ball is paid out). However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which a lottery for a big hit cannot be received), and it is possible to provide a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the display duration table for non-reach occurrence, the display duration is set shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode and as compared with the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. That is, when the number of holdings is the same, the display duration of the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the display duration of the low frequency support mode. Further, the display duration table for reach generation and the display duration table for non-reach generation are set so that the display durations are different from each other.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-generation display duration table. Are different from each other. Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is performed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. Can be determined. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

In the first embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach generation has a shorter display duration as the number of holds increases, but the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases. It may be set in the opposite relationship to that of the embodiment, and may be configured so that the display duration does not change (change) depending on the number of holdings and the support mode. Further, the display duration table for reach generation and the display duration table for non-reach generation may be the same. In this case, regardless of whether reach occurs or not, the same display duration table is referred to to determine the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the motion type counter buffer, and various counters of the RAM 64 are used. It may be set in the display duration counter provided in the area 641. Further, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the pass / fail result and the distribution result.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914 as shown in FIG. 22. In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processes of steps S902 to S910. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes of steps S911 to S914.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S902 whether or not the variation display of the main display unit 46 has been completed. When it is determined in step S902 that the variation display of the main display unit 46 has not been completed (NO), the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variation display of the main display unit 46 is completed (YES), in step S903, whether or not the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. judge. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the pass / fail result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (NO), that is, when it determines that the pass / fail result is the "normal deviation result", the game state transition process is performed. finish. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the pass / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (YES), the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then in step S904, the pass / fail result. Is a "special deviation result" or not.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 in step S905. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result" (NO), that is, when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether or not the round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result (YES), in step S907, "2" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64. .. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result (NO), that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result". In step S908, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the termination conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize in the large winning opening 381. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 381 corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of round games is executed.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 381 once for each round game. Further, one round game is continued until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the first embodiment, after setting the opening / closing door 382 to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the opening / closing door by satisfying one of the following two conditions (1) and (2). Set 382 to the closed state again.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 381 reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing any of the processes of step S905, step S907, and step S908, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 as a waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S909. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the gaming state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for the opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. .. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be greatly different depending on the type of.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. Here, the opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and the MPU 62 is set in step S910 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 16). The opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S911. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening in step S911 will be described in detail later.

In step S912, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S911. judge.

When it is determined in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less (YES), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S913. It is determined whether or not it is as follows.

When it is determined in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S914, and then opens / close execution. Executes the transition process at the end of the mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.

Next, the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S911 in FIG. 22 will be described in detail.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing process. In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1019 as shown in FIG. 23. In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 381 is open. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 381 is not open (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1002. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 381 is open (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1006.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 381 is not open (NO), the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S1002. It is determined whether or not it is as follows. When it is determined in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less (YES), the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1003. It is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1004. The process of opening the large winning opening will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S1005, the MPU 62 sets an open command. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 16). After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 382 has been set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 381 is being opened (YES), whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S1006, that is, opening the large winning opening. It is determined whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1003 or step S1006 of the process.

When it is determined in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 whether or not a prize has occurred in the large winning opening 381. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 381 is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the large winning opening 381.

When it is determined in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 381 (NO), the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when it is determined in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 381 (YES), the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When it is determined in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 382 to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383.

In step S1011 the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 16). The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 382 has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1018, which will be described later.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the pass / fail result is not a "special deviation result" (NO), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1013. In step S1013, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. Further, in step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is an open standby until the open / close door 382 is set to the open state, the open / close door 382 is set to the closed state again, and then the open / close door 382 is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In the first embodiment, the open waiting time is set to 1 sec, but the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016. In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the gaming state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be greatly different depending on the type of.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 16). After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the process after step S1010 described above. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the pass / fail result is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC in step S1018.

In step S1019, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 62 executes the process after step S1015 described above. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 62 executes the above-mentioned processing after S1016.

Next, the large winning opening opening process in step S1004 of FIG. 23 will be described in detail.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process. In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1106 as shown in FIG. 24. In step S1101, the MPU 62 sets “8” in the winning counter PC provided in various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64. In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the hit / fail result is not a "special deviation result" (NO), the distribution result is a small round high probability result ("unspecified small round high probability result" or in step S1104. It is determined whether or not the result is "explicit small round high accuracy result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result (YES), the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103 described above. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result (NO), the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1105. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1105, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 381 in step S1106. In this open execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 382 to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 381. Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1105 defines the upper limit duration from setting the open / close door 382 to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 sets a long-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 causes the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 in a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 381 to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC. Therefore, the upper limit duration (30 sec) of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 381 and the firing cycle of the game balls, and thus is the upper limit of eight. It is easy to get the game ball of No. 3 to win the big prize opening 381. On the other hand, since the upper limit duration (0.17 sec) of the short-time mode is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 381. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 381.

Next, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S914 of FIG. 22 will be described in detail.
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1212 as shown in FIG. 25.

In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is a "most advantageous result" or an "explicit small round high probability result". When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (YES), the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1202. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the win / fail lottery.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag (low probability result flag, unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round height) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. Clear the probability result flag and the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 20), the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Is determined.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (NO), the distribution result is "unspecified small round high" in step S1205. It is determined whether or not the result is "certain result". When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is an "unspecified low round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. ..

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1203 described above. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64 (NO), the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in the step S1207. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not an "unspecified small round high accuracy result" (NO), the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 whether or not the distribution result is a "low accuracy result". ..

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (NO), that is, when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is performed. To finish.
Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is a "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag in step S1209. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big win" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1210, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode to the high frequency support mode. In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the game count counter provided in various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64. In step S1212, the MPU 62 sets the number-of-times limit flag to the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, are set. Continue until digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game rounds have been digested. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 16), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the current gaming state. Regardless of the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode), the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the winning / fail lottery becomes a "big hit win" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state. After the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode), shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery. , The gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode). The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the number of rounds) regardless of the current game state. After the end of the specified mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. Move to mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big win", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not change.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device. As shown in FIG. 26, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. The ROM 93 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and stores various control programs and fixed value data used for executing processing according to the programs in each area. ing. The MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 60 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 93. Since the ROM 93 is chipped with the CPU and connected by an internal bus, it is relatively difficult to increase the data capacity thereof, and specifically, the data capacity is 2 Mbytes.

The RAM 94 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared with the data capacity of, the time required for reading is faster than that of ROM 93. The RAM 94 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas, for example. The RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the operation button 28 and the touch sensor 57. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the display lamp device 23, the first to third hold lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, the light emitting element drive unit 29, the display control device 100, and the like. The MPU 92 executes drive control of the indicator lamp device 23, the first to third hold lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, and the like based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. Further, the MPU 92 analyzes the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to determine the content of the effect in a predetermined period, and transmits the command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 100. A signal path provided to connect the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 is used for this command transmission. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

When the MPU 92 determines the content of the effect in a predetermined period, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of not only the display control device 100 but also the display lamp device 23. In this case, although it is described in FIG. 26 that the voice emission control board 91 and the indicator lamp device 23 are directly connected, the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice emission control board 91 and the indicator lamp device are not limited to this. A relay board may be interposed between the 23 and the relay board.

The MPU 92 executes drive control of the speaker unit 24 when the content of the effect in the predetermined period is determined. A sound output LSI 95 and a common ROM 96 are used for drive control of the speaker unit 24.

The common ROM 96 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. The common ROM 96 is not directly connected to the MPU 92, but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 95, so that it is easier to increase the data capacity than the ROM 93. Specifically, the data capacity is 1 Gbyte. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 Mbytes or 4 Gbytes.

The sound output LSI 95 includes an I / F 951, a register 952, a sound data processing unit 953, a DAC 954, and a data transfer unit 955. The sound output LSI 95 executes control for outputting sound from the speaker unit 24 according to the data transmitted from the MPU 92.

The I / F 951 is an interface for the sound output LSI 95 to communicate with the MPU 92 via a bus B1 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication. The bus B1 connected to the I / F 951 is composed of eight signal paths, and data is transmitted / received between the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95 via each signal path.

The register 952 has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 95, and uses a memory that requires external power supply for storage retention for both reading and writing. It is configured to do. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96.

The register 952 has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

The sound data processing unit 953 converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the MPU 92 and stored in the register 952 so that they can be used for sound output, and from the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 96. It has a function to create digital music sound data by using the read sound data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing. There is.

Further, the sound data processing unit 953 has a function of a plurality of sounding channels so as to be able to output a plurality of different sounds at the same time, and the digital musical sound data created for each sounding channel is synthesized to obtain digitally synthesized musical sound data. Has the function of creating. It should be noted that the plurality of sounding channels have the functions of 16 channels, but the number of channels is arbitrary. Further, by using the virtual track, a number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) larger than the actual number of sounding channels can be used, but the virtual track may not be used.

The DAC954 is a digital / analog converter and includes an amplifier circuit for analog signals. The DAC 954 has a function of amplifying an analog audio signal obtained by converting digital music data or digital synthetic music data created by the sound data processing unit 953 into an analog signal and then outputting it to the speaker unit 24.

The data transfer unit 955 is connected to the common ROM 96 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring the data read from the common ROM 96 to the register 952. ing. The bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 955 and the common ROM 96 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of the signal paths is larger than that of the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the I / F 951. It is a number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 955 and the common ROM 96 is faster than the data communication speed between the MPU 92 and the I / F 951. The data transfer unit 955 reads the sound data necessary for sound output from the common ROM 96 based on the data converted from the sequence data and the parameter data in the sound data processing unit 953, and stores it in the register 952.

Here, the data transfer unit 955 not only has a function of transferring the sound data required by the sound data processing unit 953 to the register 952, but also reads the data required by the MPU 92 from the common ROM 96 and stores it in the register 952. It has a function of transferring the data stored in the register 952 to the MPU 92. The configuration related to data transfer will be described below.

<Data structure of ROM 93 and common ROM 96>
First, the data configurations of the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the ROM 93, and FIG. 27 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the common ROM 96.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the ROM 93 contains a program and processing data (1), a program and processing data (2), ..., A program for executing a process for effect control by the MPU 92. And the processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 95. All the programs and processing data necessary for executing the processing for effect control in the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93.

The ROM 93 is used not only for program and processing data (1), program and processing data (2), ..., Program and processing data (P), but also for controlling light emission of the indicator lamp device 23. The light emission data (1), the light emission data (2), ..., The light emission data (Q) to be generated are stored in advance. In each of these light emission data, information on the type of light emitting unit to be lit, the lighting period, and the lighting order of the display lamp device 23 is set in the predetermined effect period, and the contents of these light emission patterns are set. It differs depending on the type of each emission data. Each of the light emission data stored in the ROM 93 has a different light emission control period, and the content of the light emission pattern is different.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the common ROM 96 has sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., Sound used for outputting a predetermined sound from the speaker unit 24. The data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes melody actually sounded by a musical instrument corresponding to various tones and waveform data obtained by sampling a sound, and a melody with lyrics is sounded by a musical instrument corresponding to various tones. In addition to the melody that has been made, the waveform data obtained by sampling the voice is included. All the sound data is stored in the common ROM 96. The sound data stored in the common ROM 96 includes music (BGM) used in the effects A to D of FIG. 31, which will be described later, sound data corresponding to the sound (music data and sound data), and FIG. 42. Sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voice used in the production of the first mode M1 to the fifth mode M5, and the music and voice used in the production MA to MC of the fourth mode of FIG. Corresponding sound data (music data and voice data) and the like are included.

The sound data is digital signal data obtained by converting an analog signal into a pulse train at a predetermined sampling frequency and a predetermined number of quantization signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantization signals is 16 bits. Therefore, the waveform data of the sound composed of the analog signal for 1 sec has a data amount of 1 × 44.1 k × 16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling period T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

The sound data is set so as to be readable from the common ROM 96 for each pulse code-modulated data for one pulse, that is, data for one sample. That is, the address is set for each sample of data, and the data transfer unit 955 of the sound output LSI 95 can transfer data from the common ROM 96 in units of data for one sample.

The sampling frequency is not limited to 44.1 kHz as long as good sampling can be achieved, and may be, for example, 32 kHz, 48 kHz, or 96 kHz. Further, the number of quantization signals is not limited to 16 bits, and may be any number of bits other than 16 bits as long as good quantization can be realized.

Returning to the description of FIG. 27 (b), the common ROM 96 contains not only sound data (1), sound data (2), ... sound data (S), but also light emission data (Q + 1) and light emission data (Q + 2). ), ..., The light emission data (R) is stored in advance. Each of these light emission data has a different period of target light emission control and a different light emission pattern.

As described above, the light emission data used in the MPU 92 is stored not only in the ROM 93 directly connected to the MPU 92 of the MPU 92 via the bus, but also in the common ROM 96 connected to the sound output LSI 95. .. In other words, the light emission data is distributed and stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96.

By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96 in this way, it is possible to increase the data capacity of the light emission data without increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 93. In particular, as described above, the ROM 93 is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity due to being connected via the internal bus in the MPU 92, and attempts to increase the data capacity are attempted. Then, it becomes necessary to expand the internal bus width, and it is not easy to deal with it. On the other hand, as described above, the common ROM 96 is not directly connected to the MPU 92, but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 95, thereby increasing its data capacity. That is relatively easy. Then, by storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96, it is possible to cope well with the increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

Further, basically, when setting data in the ROM, about several% (for example, about 2%) of the total data capacity is blank (unused area). In this case, for example, assuming that the data capacity of the common ROM 96 is 1 Gbyte, the blank is 20 Mbytes. This data capacity is larger than the data capacity of the ROM 93, which is 2 Mbytes. According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data by using such a blank.

Furthermore, since the sound data corresponds to the melody and voice for a predetermined period, the data capacity for performing a series of outputs is relatively large. Then, it becomes difficult to accommodate the data capacity of the sound data, and from this point as well, a blank is likely to occur in the common ROM 96. Then, according to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data by using such a blank.

The light emission data stored in the common ROM 96 is used in the MPU 92, and when it becomes necessary to use it in the MPU 92, it is commonly used in the sound output LSI 95 in response to a transfer instruction from the MPU 92. The light emission data from the ROM 96 is read out, and the read light emission data is transferred to the MPU 92. Then, in this transfer, the bus B1 connecting the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95 is used. That is, the light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 96 is transferred to the MPU 92 by using the signal path for transferring data from the MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 95 or from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92. As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which a ROM different from the ROM 93 is externally attached to the MPU 92 and the surplus light emission data is stored in the ROM, the surplus light emission data is obtained without increasing the number of signal paths. Can be memorized.

Of the program and processing data used in the MPU 92 and the light emission data, all of the program and processing data are stored in the ROM 93, and a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96. By doing so, it becomes possible to satisfactorily distribute the data. That is, if the program and processing data are distributed to the common ROM 96, the program and processing data for transferring the program and processing data to the RAM 94 of the MPU 92 are separately required, and the program design becomes complicated. It will be something like that. On the other hand, the light emission data is a method in which the address where the light emission data is originally stored is grasped, the light emission data is read out and transferred based on the address, and the light emission data is expanded so that it can be used. Therefore, even if the light emission data is distributed, the program design is less likely to be complicated.

Further, when the effect system command is transmitted from the main control device 60, the MPU 92 first uses a program to execute a predetermined process corresponding to the command, and uses the light emission data in the execution process of the predetermined process. And controls the indicator lamp device 23. That is, the program needs to be read suddenly in response to the reception of a command from the main control device 60, and the timing of reading is highly arbitrary, whereas the light emission data is used in the execution process of a predetermined process. The timing of reading is low. Further, since the light emission data is used on the premise of executing a predetermined process using the program, the priority of reading is higher in the program, and if the read of the program is delayed, the process waits. Under such circumstances, the program is stored in the ROM 93, and at least a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96, so that the program can be independently read by the MPU 92 regardless of the state of the sound output LSI 95. It is possible to satisfactorily increase the amount of data for luminescence data, which tends to have a larger amount of data than the program.

Furthermore, instead of storing all of the light emission data in the common ROM 96, a part of the light emission data is stored in the ROM 93 and the rest is stored in the common ROM 96, so that the data capacity of the common ROM 96 can be increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the excessive increase.

<Structure of register 952 of sound output LSI95>
Next, refer to FIG. 28 for the configuration of the register 952 used for instructing the sound output LSI 95 from the MPU 92 to output the sound and transferring the sound data stored in the common ROM 96 from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92. I will explain while doing. FIG. 28 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the register 952.

As shown in FIG. 28, the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 is based on the areas 9523a to 9523e where data is set when the MPU 92 gives an instruction to output sound to the sound output LSI 95, and the data transfer instruction from the MPU 92. Buffers 9524a to 9524e for temporarily storing and holding the data read from the common ROM 96, a transfer instruction area 9525 for setting data when instructing the sound output LSI 95 to transfer data, and sound. A flag area 9526 for recognizing the internal state of the output LSI 95 in the MPU 92 is provided separately.

In detail, each of the above areas 9523a to 9526 is an area for setting data when instructing sound output to be an area 9523a for the first parameter, an area 9523b for the second parameter, and an area 9523c for the third parameter. It also has a plurality of parameters 9523a to 9523d such as the area 9523d for the fourth parameter. In addition, an area 9523e for sequence data is provided.

In the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter, the parameter data necessary for outputting the melody and the sound effect are stored, and the parameter data necessary for outputting the voice are stored. By providing a plurality of parameter areas 9523a to 9523d in this way, it is possible to simultaneously pronounce a plurality of sounds. Further, the sequence data already described is stored in the sequence data area 9523e.

Incidentally, since the sound output LSI 95 has a function for 16 channels, parameter data for a plurality of (specifically, 4) channels are stored in the area for one parameter. Further, in the configuration using the virtual track, a larger number of parameters may be stored in the area for one parameter.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area where data is set when a data transfer instruction is given from the MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 95. In the transfer instruction area 9525, the address data of the light emission data required for the MPU 92 is stored, and the data for giving the transfer instruction of the light emission data read from the common ROM 96 to the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92 is stored. ..

A plurality of external read buffers 9524a to 9524e are provided as areas for temporarily storing and holding the data read from the common ROM 96 based on the data transfer instruction from the MPU 92. The light emission data required for the MPU 92 is temporarily stored in the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and is transferred to the MPU 92 when a predetermined reading timing is reached.

A flag area 9526 is provided as an area for recognizing the internal state of the sound output LSI 95 in the MPU 92. As the flag area 9526, for example, a read completion flag is provided, and when the transfer of the corresponding data from the common ROM 96 to the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e is completed in response to the data transfer instruction from the MPU 92. , "1" is stored in the read completion flag, and the fact is grasped in the MPU 92.

The areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are all accessible areas from the MPU 92, but the areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are simultaneously accessed. Instead, the accessible target can be switched. That is, the number of areas that can be accessed simultaneously in the MPU 92 corresponds to the number of the first signal path to the eighth signal path (eight in the present embodiment) constituting the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95. There is.

Specifically, as the first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path constituting the bus B1, the area 9523a for the first parameter and the buffer 9524a for external reading of 1 are allocated to form the bus B1. As the second area 9521b corresponding to the second signal path, the area 9523b for the second parameter and the buffer 9524b for external reading of 1 are assigned, and the third area corresponding to the third signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned. The area 9523c for the third parameter and the buffer 9524c for external reading of 1 are assigned as the 9521c, and the area 9523d for the fourth parameter is assigned as the fourth area 9521d corresponding to the fourth signal path constituting the bus B1. And 1 external read buffer 9524d is allocated. Further, as the fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path constituting the bus B1, the area 9523e for sequence data and the buffer 9524e for external reading of 1 are allocated.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is assigned as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path constituting the bus B1, and a flag area 9526 is assigned as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path constituting the bus B1. ..

Selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided for the registers 952 corresponding to the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e, and the selectors 9522a to 9522e use the MPU 92 as the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e. The accessible area can be switched. Then, this switching is performed through binary switching to the selector area 9527 provided in the register 952 corresponding to the eighth signal path constituting the bus B1.

Specifically, when the information of the selector area 9527 is "0" which is the initial value, the sound output control of the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e is performed by setting the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to the areas 9523a to 9523e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value, the MPU 92 can access the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter and the area 9523e for the sequence data, and sounds to the sound output LSI 95. It is in a state where it is possible to give an output instruction. That is, the sound output LSI 95 is in the first interference state with respect to the MPU 92.

When the information in the selector area 9527 is "1", which is the switching execution value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are buffers 9524a for external reading due to the setting of the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to ~ 9524e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value, the MPU 92 can access the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and can read the data for which the transfer instruction has been given. It becomes. That is, the sound output LSI 95 is in a second interference state with the MPU 92.

On the other hand, the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 are not subject to switching by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. Therefore, the MPU 92 can access the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 regardless of the interference state of the sound output LSI 95.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 controls the VDP 105 based on a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the MPU 102 controls the VDP 105 by analyzing a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 and generating a command for the VDP 105 based on the analysis result.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, is a non-volatile memory that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information, and cannot be written. It is a semiconductor element. This program ROM 103 has various areas such as an effect data storage area 1031, an effect data storage area 1032, and various table data storage areas 1033. These areas will be described in detail later.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile and requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a memory. The work RAM 104 has various areas such as various counter areas 1041 and various flag storage areas 1042. These areas will be described in detail later. In the first embodiment, a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 104, but a non-volatile memory such as MRAM may be used.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 stores in advance various image data (image information) including sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 51, background data, and moving image data, and functions as an image data library. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display content of the symbol display device 51 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

Returning to the explanation of the voice emission control device 90, the MPU 92 recognizes that it is necessary to start the effect for the game round by receiving the variable command transmitted from the main control device 60, and the effect for the game round. Execute the start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 60, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and the game round effect end process is executed. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 60, it is recognized that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect process is executed. Further, by receiving the demo display command transmitted from the main control device 60, it is recognized that the demo display needs to be started, and the demo display process is executed. The command reception from the main control device 60 in the MPU 92 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 60, and may be a configuration in which the command relayed by the relay board is received. ..

In the game rounding effect start processing, based on both the variable command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game round and the presence / absence of reach display are grasped. The reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in this game round. In addition to executing the grasping process, the symbol type grasping process for determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is executed in this game round. Then, based on the result of each of these grasping processes, the display control device 100 displays a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. Send to.

Further, in the game rounding effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for whether or not to display a notice is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the notice display is also executed. Then, if the notice display is won, a notice command including information on the type of the notice display is transmitted to the display control device 100. Further, in the game rounding effect start processing, the light emitting data (including the sequence data and the parameter data) for the game round and the sound data (sequence data and the parameter data) for the game round are input based on the processing result of each of the above processes. (Including) is read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the light emitting mode by the indicator lamp device 23 and the output mode from the speaker unit 24 are defined.

In the game round production end process, the light emission control of the indicator lamp device 23 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 24 in the current game round are terminated. Further, in the game rounding effect end process, an end command including information for ending the game rounding effect is transmitted to the display control device 100. In the jackpot effect processing, based on the various commands for the jackpot effect received, the effect mode such as opening, each round, between each round, and the ending is grasped, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped result is grasped. Command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Further, based on the grasped result, the display data for the jackpot effect, the sequence data for the jackpot effect, the parameter data and the sound data, and the light emission data are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the light emission of the display lamp device 23 during the jackpot effect. The mode and the mode of outputting the sound from the speaker unit 24 are defined.

In the demo display process, the demo display effect mode is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 100. Further, based on the grasped result, the light emission data for demo display (including sequence data and parameter data) and the sound data for demo display (including sequence data and parameter data) are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96. It defines the light emitting mode of the display lamp device 23 by the light emitting element driving unit 29 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 24 during the demo display. The process executed by the MPU 92 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 includes a process for controlling light emission of various lamp units 53 to 55 in addition to the above process.

Further, the MPU 92 recognizes that the operation button 28 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the operation button 28 based on the operation of the operation unit of the operation button 28, and performs an operation correspondence process. Run. In addition, even when the operated state is canceled, it is recognized by the falling edge of the operation signal, and the operation correspondence process is executed. In the operation correspondence process, the operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and the operation generation command including the information that the operation button 28 is operated and the information of the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 100. Further, in the operation correspondence process, when the operation of the operation unit is canceled (cancelled), the operation cancellation command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Further, in the operation corresponding process, in addition to the transmission of the above command, the light emitting mode by the light emitting element driving unit 29 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 24 are defined to correspond to the operation of the operation button 28.

The display control device 100 determines whether to perform the advance notice effect using the first accessory 310 according to the fluctuation pattern displayed on the symbol display device 51. Then, when the display control device 100 decides to perform the advance notice effect using the first accessory 310, the operation mode of the first accessory 310 determined to be used in the advance notice effect is included. The display control device 100 notifies the voice emission control device 90 to that effect as a command to start the operation of the accessory. The voice emission control device 90 has a solenoid or a solenoid provided in each movable accessory so that the first accessory 310 indicated by the accessory operation start command operates in the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command. Drive the motor. Details of the display control device 100 will be described later.

For example, the one-shot notification lottery counter is a counter for operating the first accessory 310 to draw a lottery as to whether or not to perform one-shot notification, and when to perform one-shot notification, at what timing. This one-announcement lottery counter is configured as a loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 255. The update of the one-announcement lottery counter is performed in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds, and the value of the one-announcement lottery counter increases by one for each update. Then, when the value of the one-shot notification lottery counter is 255 and the update is performed, the value is returned to 0.

The lottery for one notification is performed when a display stop type command is received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, based on the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display, when the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol, whether or not to make one notification in the variation effect corresponding to the stop symbol is one shot. When making a notification, the timing at which one notification is made is determined based on the value of the one-shot notification lottery counter.

The one-shot notification flag is a flag indicating that one-shot notification is to be performed, and when it is on, it indicates that one-shot notification is to be performed, and when it is off, it indicates that one-shot notification is not performed. The one notification flag is initialized to off in the initial setting process executed after the power is turned on. Then, when it is decided to perform one notification as a result of the lottery for one notification, the one notification flag is set to ON. Then, one announcement is made.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged by bidirectional communication between the MPU 92 of the voice emission control board 91 and the MPU 102 of the display control board 101. Then, by exchanging commands by bidirectional communication, in the MPU 92, light emission control of various light emitting units, sound output control of the speaker unit 24, and various movable objects including the first accessory 310 which is a movable accessory Drive control is executed, and in MPU 102, display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed. Hereinafter, specific processing contents for executing these various controls will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device. The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, a 2 msec cycle) executes steps S1301 to S1307, as shown in FIG. 29.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the received command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1302, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In step S1303, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. The effect determination process in step S1302 and the demo display execution process in step S1303 will be described in detail later.

In step S1304, the MPU 92 executes the operation acceptance process. Specifically, the MPU 92 monitors the input of whether or not the touch sensor 57 operated by the player is operated in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and produces an effect corresponding to the case where the operation of the touch sensor 57 is confirmed. Set to do. In this step, when the operation of the touch sensor 57 by the player is detected, a touch sensor operation command for notifying the display control device 100 that the touch sensor 57 has been operated is set.

Further, in step S1304, the MPU 92 monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 28 has been operated. When the operation button 28 is operated during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 100 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage (for example, "coastal stage", "personal stage", "underwater stage", etc., in this rear image change command, the display control device 100 has a design. A process of changing the rear image displayed on the display device 51 to an image corresponding to the stage is performed.

Further, when the operation button 28 is operated during the period of selecting the effect type, the MPU 92 performs a process of changing the effect type after the ending, and sets an effect type change command for the display control device 100. By including information on the type corresponding to the changed effect and the like in this effect type change command, the display control device 100 changes the image displayed on the symbol display device 51 to the image corresponding to the selected effect. The processing is performed, and the music (BGM) output from the speaker unit 24 becomes music according to the selected effect.

In addition, the operation button 28 may display the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation by pressing the operation button 28 when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, or press the operation button 28 during the reach production. The operation button 28 may be changed to an effect that gives a feeling of expectation for a big hit, or the operation button 28 may be used as a decision button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. In this embodiment, the process of changing the stage during the period in which the variation effect is not executed or the high-speed variation period and the process of changing the effect type after the ending are performed based on the operation of the operation button 28. , The process of changing the stage and the process of changing the effect type after the ending may be performed based on the operations by different operation buttons.

In step S1305, the MPU 92 controls light emission to control the light emission of the indicator lamp device 23 and the first to third hold lamp units 53 to 55 based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S1302 to the operation reception process of step S1304. Execute the process. In step S1306, the MPU 92 executes a voice control process for controlling the speaker unit 24 based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S1302 to the operation reception process of step S1304.

In step S1307, the MPU 92 drives the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a, the first accessory rotation motor, and the like of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, to operate the first accessory 310. Execute drive processing. It should be noted that this accessory drive process also includes the light emitting / blinking operation of the LED built in the center of the first accessory 310. The details of this accessory drive process will be described later. After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process. The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1414 as shown in FIG.

In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received. When it is determined in step S1401 that the MPU 92 has not received each command (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1409. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S1401 (YES), the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" based on the content of the type command in step S1402. It is determined whether or not it is.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1403. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1 ・ 1 ・ 1" or "2 ・ 2 ・ 2") is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the stop symbol valid line The information related to the combination of symbols (for example, "2.2.2") having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on L is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" (NO), in step S1404, the game result is "normally out of order" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not it is a "result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S1404 that the game result is not a "normal deviation result" (NO), that is, the game result is a "special deviation result", an "unspecified small round high probability result", and an "explicit small round high". If it is determined to be one of the "probability results", the common symbol determination process is executed in step S1405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normally out-of-order result" in the winning / failing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1404 that the game result is a "normal deviation result" (YES), the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S1406. In this symbol determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the reach display symbols as the stop display finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as the stop display finally displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from any of the combinations of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1403, step S1405, and step S1406, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the data stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp device 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1408, the MPU 92 includes a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S1403, step S1405, and step S1406, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1407. Is transmitted to the display control device 100. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 provides a data table for executing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 51 based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92 in the effect data storage area of the program ROM 103. Read from 1031. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the game round based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Finally stop display.

After executing the process of step S1408, or when it is determined in step S1401 that the variable command and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1409 and subsequent steps. In step S1409, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1409 that the opening command has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1413. Further, when it is determined in step S1409 that the opening command has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1410.

In step S1411, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the game result determined in step S1410. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1410 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 is used as an effect for the open / close execution mode. Select the effect A.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is an "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is executed 15 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, in step S1411, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S1412, the MPU 92 transmits a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1411 to the display control device 100. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 51 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has not been received after executing the process of step S1412 or in step S1409 (NO), the effect of causing the player to select the mode effect after the jackpot game ends in step S1413. It is determined whether or not to generate the type selection process, and the effect type selection process is executed according to the determination result. This effect type selection process will be described in detail later.

In step S1414, the MPU 92 performs other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes, for example, an effect transition process. In the effect transition process, the MPU 92 executes the process of transferring the game mode from the jackpot game to the RUSH mode based on the effects MA to MC selected by the player. Further, in step S1414, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode and the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode based on the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction. As shown in FIG. 31, the pachinko machine 10 has "big hit winning" and "special losing result" winning / failing results, "unspecified small round high probability result", and "explicit" as game results excluding "normal loss result". It has "small round high probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 31, the “special missed result” is a game result selected when the “big hit winning” is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol × in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ○ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the like. And the contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the "special loss result" does not shift to the winning / failing lottery mode. In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 2 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In this way, the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

Further, in the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. This effect A includes an effect for opening the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device in the open / close execution mode, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode. It is composed as a series of productions. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result" and "unspecified small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 51 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is a "special deviation result" or an "unspecified small round high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect A. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in an "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 51 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect B. This effect B includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 51 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 381 is 15 in a long time mode. It is executed once. Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C. This effect C includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode. It is configured.

Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / fail lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "best result" and "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. This effect D includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured.

In the first embodiment, the production time of each opening effect is the same. Further, in the first embodiment, the production time of each ending effect is the same. However, the production time of the opening effect and the production time of the ending effect are arbitrary, and the production time of the opening effect and the production of the ending effect may be different. Further, the production time may be different for each game result, that is, for each opening production, or the production time may be different only for a part of the opening production. Further, the production time may be different for each game result, that is, for each ending production, or the production time may be different only for a part of the ending production.

<Determining the production pattern>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process of FIG. In the process of determining the effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display, and also determines the content of the notice display (including the presence / absence and result of the notification) and the timing at which the notice display is generated. To set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the operation notice part described later to suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, in other words, the notice display is executed. It does not suggest to the player that the form of notifying the player to do so (hereinafter, also referred to as the notification display with notification) and the operation notice part described later are executed and the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It has a form, in other words, a form in which notification of executing the notice display is not performed (hereinafter, also referred to as a notice-less notice display).

In the following description, among the notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process, only the notice display related to the touch sensor 57 will be described, and the description of the other notice displays will be omitted. In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery for whether or not to generate another notice display. However, the touch sensor Only the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display related to 57 may be executed.

In step S1501, the MPU 92 executes the notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display by using the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94.

The notice display lottery counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery (notice display lottery) as to whether or not to generate a notice display based on the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the buffer for the notice display lottery counter. Specifically, whether or not the MPU 92 generates the notice display by acquiring the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer and comparing this value with the notice display table. Execute the lottery. The notice display table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice display, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the notice display table is a table referred to when a lottery for the presence / absence of a notice display is performed with respect to the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display table has a plurality of distribution results of "notified no result", "notified noticed result", and "notified no noticed result" as distribution destinations. For example, in the notice display table, among the values "0 to 19" of the notice display lottery counter, "0 to 9" (probability 1/2) is assigned to "no notice result", and "10 to 14" (probability 1). / 4) is assigned to "Notified result with notice", and "15-19" (probability 1/4) is assigned to "Result without notice".

In step S1502, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the notice display lottery has been won in step S1501. When the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the advance notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S1503.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), in step S1503, the operation notice part described later is executed and the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is determined whether or not to suggest to the player to hold the hand over the position, in other words, whether or not to notify that the notice display is executed. When the MPU 92 determines in step S1503 that the notification is to be performed (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notification presence notice display setting process in step S1504. In this notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of the notification (with notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310.
Further, the MPU 92 is set to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , The result of the notice display may be determined by setting so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed on the display screen G.

Further, in step S1504, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing at which the notice display is generated as the waiting time (waiting period) for the notification presence notice display generation timing in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so that the waiting time for the notification display occurrence timing is 1 sec. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notice display is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1503 that the notification is not performed (NO), the MPU 92 executes the notification non-notification display setting process in step S1505. In this notification non-notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of notification (no notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310. Further, the MPU 92 may determine the result of the advance notice display by setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles based on the information related to the result of success or failure.

Further, in step S1505, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing at which the notice display is generated as the wait time (standby period) for the notification / no notice display occurrence timing in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so that the waiting time for the notification non-notification display occurrence timing is 1 sec. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notification no notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". In this case, the result of the notice display is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is increased, and the winning / failing result is "big hit winning". If it is determined that this is not the case, the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven may be lowered, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", it increases the probability of setting the display screen G to display the school of fish or bubbles, and determines that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". If this is the case, the probability of setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles may be lowered, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.

In step S1506, the MPU 92 sets the advance notice winning flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the notice display is generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Then, when the result of the advance notice display is notified, the MPU 92 clears the advance notice winning flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

In the above description, when it is determined in step S1502 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the player is suggested to hold his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in step S1503. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not to notify that the notice display is executed is determined by a distribution lottery. In other words, it is decided by a distribution lottery whether the notice given at the same timing is notified or not.
However, the notice display of "notification available" suggesting to the player to hold his hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and the "notifying" not suggesting to the player to hold his hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. The notice display of "no notification" may be displayed independently.
In this case, a lottery as to whether or not to give a notice of "notification available" suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the display screen G, and suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Do not Independently draw lots on whether or not to give a notice of "no notification"
When the lottery result is to display a notice, for the notice display of "no notification", a "no notification" notice display is generated at a timing determined for each fluctuation pattern (variation time), and a "notification yes" notice is displayed. Regarding the display, the timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) may be determined by lottery using a counter and a distribution table.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an operation notice part of the notice display. The notice display of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the operation notice part, and the result of the notice display is given to the player in the notice result notification part. Notify. Hereinafter, the advance notice display of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 33. It should be noted that the operation notice part is executed only in the case of the notification display with notification, and is not executed in the case of the notification without notification display.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the advance notice display includes an image GB1A indicating that a hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and a timer indicating the duration of the operation advance notice part. The gauge GB2A is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed on the lower side of this image GB1A. Then, the notice display shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57, and when the big hit occurrence is won in the notice result notification part, FIG. 33 (b) shows. As shown, the player can rotate the first accessory 310 clockwise (clockwise) in the game area 31R near the position where the first accessory 310 is driven and lowered to the maximum point position. A notice effect (one-shot notification chance effect) is performed in which the first accessory 310 that has been rotated is made to be visually recognized and a notice that a big hit will be made in the fluctuation effect. At this time, the advance notice effect is further emphasized by making the LED (not shown) built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first accessory 310 emit light in combination with the operation of the first accessory 310. Further, the display of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is controlled so that the brightness around the first accessory 310 becomes higher in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 310. As a result, the advance notice effect by the first accessory 310 is further emphasized.

Further, in the notice display, if the jackpot occurrence is not won in the notice result notification part, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the result of the notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the person.

In the present embodiment, the notice display notifies the player of the result of the notice display depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the notice result notification part, but the notice display is the notice result. In the notification part, by setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles when a big hit has been won, the result of the notice display is notified to the player, and when the big hit has not been won. , The result of the notice display may be determined by setting so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed on the display screen G.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the timing at which the notice display is generated.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the notice display occurs at various timings from the start to the end of the game round. For example, in the notification display with notification, the timing TM1 from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 until the normal reach display (normal reach) is generated, or the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 51. After that, the timing until the reach display (super reach) of the display duration longer than the normal reach display is generated, and the reach display (special reach) of the display duration longer than the super reach display is generated. It occurs at various timings such as the timing TM3 and the timing TM4 from the generation of the special reach by the symbol display device 51 to the stop of the variable display of the symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notification no notice display is a reach display (super) having a longer display duration than the normal reach display (normal reach) after the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 51 shown in FIG. 34. Timing until the reach) is generated Although it occurs at the timing of TM2, it may be generated at various timings from the start to the end of the game round, as in the case of the advance notice display without notification. Further, in the present embodiment, the reception time of the notification non-notification display (time specified by the timer counter TB described later) is longer than the notification presence notification display (for example, 10 seconds).

In this embodiment, only the case where the notice display occurs in the timing TM1 will be described, and the description about the case where the notice display occurs at other timings will be omitted.
Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 92 generates the notice display only once at any of the timings TM1 to TM4, but the notice display may be generated a plurality of times at each timing TM1 to TM4. good.

<Regarding the audio emission side notice display execution process executed by the audio emission control device 90>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice emitting side notice display execution process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice emission side notice display execution process in order to execute the notice display determined in the effect pattern determination process. In this voice light emitting side notice display execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG. 35.

In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S1602.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the advance notice display is generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 whether or not the advance notice display is being generated.
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated by referring to the area indicating the advance notice display generating flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the notice display generation flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the notice display generation flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when the notice display is generated, and notifies the result of the notice display. At this time, the warning display generation flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display generation flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 that the notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 that the notice display is not occurring (NO), the timing for generating the notice display set in step S1504 or step S1505 of FIG. 32 in step S1603, That is, it is determined whether or not the timing TM1 has been reached.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the timing counter TMB set in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S1504 or step S1505 of FIG. 32 is "0" or less, it is determined that the timing TM1 has been reached. If it is determined that the value of the timing counter TMB is not "0" or less, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.
In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing (1 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed after starting the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51, the timing TM1 is set. When it is determined that the timing has been reached and the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing has not elapsed, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1603 that the timing TM1 for generating the notice display set in step S1504 or step S1505 of FIG. 32 has not been reached (NO), the MPU 92 does not execute the processing after step S1604. The sound emitting side notice display execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the notice display set in step S1504 or step S1505 of FIG. 32 has been reached (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notice display generation process in step S1604. .. The details of the notice display generation process in step S1604 will be described later.

After executing the notice display generation process in step S1604, or when it is determined in step S1602 that the notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1605.
In step S1605, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not 5 sec, which is the standby time for the touch sensor, has elapsed after the warning display is generated. Here, the standby time for the touch sensor may be different between the notification display with notification and the notification without notification display. In this case, the standby for the touch sensor is not notified in the notification / no notification display. The time is preferably longer than that of the notice display with notification, and is preferably about 10 sec, for example.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1606.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S1609.

First, in step S1605, a process (process after step S1606) when it is determined by the MPU 92 that the value set in the timer counter TB of various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less will be described.
In step S1606, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 57.

If it is determined in step S1606 that the player is not holding his hand over the touch sensor 57 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S1607. ..
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1606 that the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 57 (YES), the MPU 92 executes the advance notice result notification process in step S1607. In this notice result notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player of the result of the notice display generated in step S1604. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the first accessory 310, display control on the display screen G, and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player of the result of the notice display. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a notice result notification command to the display control device 100 to recognize that the notice result notification process has been executed.
The display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. This process will be described in detail later.

In step S1608, the MPU 92 clears the warning display generating flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Specifically, the MPU 92 clears the notice display occurrence flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. After that, the MPU 92 ends the sound emitting side notice display execution process.

Next, in step S1605, a process (process after step S1609) when it is determined by the MPU 92 that the value set in the timer counter TB of various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1609, the MPU 92 executes the advance notice failure notification process. In this advance notice failure notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified. After that, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1608 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified. do. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a notice failure notification command to the display control device 100 to recognize that the notice failure notification process has been executed.
The display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. This process will be described in detail later.

In the above description, when it is determined in step S1605 that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less in MPU 92 (YES), the MPU 92 is determined in step S1609. The notice failure notification process for notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified is being executed, but the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 in the MPU 92 is "0". If it is determined that the result is less than or equal to (YES), the MPU 92 may execute the process of step S1608 without notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the notice display generation process.
In the notice display generation process, the MPU 92 generates a notice display based on the notice winning flags set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, and sets the above-mentioned notice display generation flag in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The advance notice winning flag also includes information on the presence or absence of notification.

In step S1701, the MPU 92 executes the advance notice display generation process based on the advance notice winning flags set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
In the warning display generation process, the MPU 92, for example, drives the first accessory 310, controls the light emission of the display lamp device 23, and controls the voice of the speaker unit 24.

In step S1702, the MPU 92 sets the above-mentioned notice display generating flag in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
Further, in step S1702, the MPU 92 sets "1000" as the standby time (standby period) for the touch sensor in the timer counter TB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. The standby time for the touch sensor defines the duration (duration) of the operation notice part from the generation of the notice display to the end of the operation notice part. The value set in the timer counter TB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so that the standby time for the touch sensor is 5 sec. The standby time for the touch sensor is not limited to this and is arbitrary. Further, in the present embodiment, the standby time for the touch sensor is set to be the same for the notification with notification display and the notification without notification display, but the notification with notification display and the notification without notification display may be different. .. In this case, since it is not notified that the screen is touched in the notification / non-notification display, the standby time for the touch sensor is preferably longer than that in the notification / notification display, and is preferably about 10 sec, for example.

Further, in step S1702, the MPU 92 transmits a notice display generation command to the display control device 100 to recognize that the notice display generation process has been executed. The notice display generation command includes information related to the content and result of the notice display generated in this notice display generation process. Further, the warning display generation command includes information related to the timer counter TB.
The display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the notice display generation command transmitted from the MPU 92. This process will be described in detail later.

<Regarding the display side notice display execution process executed by the display control device 100>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display side notice display execution process.
The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes the display side notice display execution process in order to execute the notice display determined in the effect pattern determination process of the voice emission control device 90. In this display-side notice display execution process, as shown in FIG. 37, the MPU 102 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S1801 to S1808.

In step S1801, the MPU 102 determines whether or not the advance notice display generation command transmitted from the MPU 92 has been received.
When the MPU 102 determines in step S1801 that the warning display generation command has not been received (NO), the MPU 102 executes the processes after step S1803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 102 determines in step S1801 that the notice display generation command has been received (YES), the MPU 102 executes the notice display generation process in step S1802.

In this notice display generation process, the MPU 102 identifies the content and result of the notice display based on the content of the notice display generation command, and corresponds to the timer counter TB provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 described above. The standby time (standby period) for the touch sensor is set in the timer counter TB provided in the various counter areas 1041 of the work RAM 104.

Further, in the advance notice display generation process of step S1802, the MPU 102 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104. When the MPU 102 determines that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 102 generates the notice display and sets 1 in the area indicating the notice display generating flag provided in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104. By substituting, the flag indicating that the notice is being displayed is set.
The MPU 102 determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated by referring to the area indicating the advance notice display generating flag provided in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104. The MPU 102 clears the notice display occurrence flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104 when the result of the notice display is notified.

Next, the MPU 102 executes a suggestion for generating a notice display and for the player to operate the touch sensor 57, in other words, for holding the player's hand over the symbol display device 51. The data table for this purpose is read from various data storage areas 1032 of the program ROM 103. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 generates a notice display and makes a suggestion for the player to operate the touch sensor 57.

Specifically, when the MPU 102 generates a notice display of the central operation position (when the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104), FIG. 33 (a) is shown in the operation notice part. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the player is suggested to hold his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and in the notice result notification part, the first accessory 310 is driven as shown in FIG. 33 (b). Depending on whether or not, the result of the notice display is notified to the player.

After executing the notice display generation process in step S1802, or when it is determined in step S1801 that the notice display generation command has not been received (NO), the MPU 102 executes the processes after step S1803.

In step S1803, the MPU 102 determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated. Here, the MPU 102 determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated by referring to the area indicating the advance notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104.

When the MPU 102 determines in step S1803 that the notice display is not occurring (NO), the MPU 102 ends the display side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S1804.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1803 that the advance notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 102 determines whether or not the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 is received in step S1804. do.

If it is determined in step S1804 that the MPU 102 has received the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 (YES), the MPU 102 executes the advance notice failure notification process in step S1805. In this advance notice failure notification process, the MPU 102 displays a symbol for notifying the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified based on the content of the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. The data table to be executed by the device 51 is read from various data storage areas 1032 of the program ROM 103. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified.

In step S1806, the MPU 102 clears various flags set in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104. Specifically, the MPU 102 clears various flags by substituting 0 into the area indicating each operation position flag and the advance notice display generating flag provided in the various flag storage areas 1042 of the work RAM 104. After that, the MPU 102 ends the display side notice display execution process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 102 determines in step S1804 that the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 has not been received (NO), the MPU 102 issues the advance notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 in step S1807. Determine if it is being received.

When the MPU 102 determines in step S1807 that the notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 has not been received (NO), the display side notice display execution process is terminated without executing the processes after step S1808. do.
On the other hand, if the MPU 102 determines in step S1807 that the advance notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 has been received (YES), the MPU 102 executes the advance notice result notification process in step S1808.

In the notice result notification process, the MPU 102 is a data table for executing an effect for notifying the player of the result of the notice display to the player based on the content of the notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 on the symbol display device 51. Is read from various data storage areas 1032 of the program ROM 103. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player of the result of the notice display. After that, the MPU 102 executes the processes after step S1806 described above.

<Display side accessory drive processing>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display side accessory drive process.
As described above, in the accessory drive process, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 determines whether to perform the advance notice effect using the first accessory 310 according to the fluctuation pattern displayed on the symbol display device 51. Then, when the display control device 100 decides to perform the advance notice effect using the first accessory 310, the operation mode of the first accessory 310 determined to be used in the advance notice effect is included. The display control device 100 notifies the voice emission control device 90 to that effect as a command to start the operation of the accessory. In the following description, the driving mode of the first accessory 310 will be described by taking as an example the driving mode of the first accessory 310 in one notification.

In step S1901, the MPU 102 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the main control unit 60 have been received. When it is determined in step S1901 that the MPU 102 has not received each command (NO), the MPU 102 ends the execution of the display-side accessory drive process.
Further, when the variation command and the type command are received in step S1901 (YES), the MPU 102 determines in step S1902 whether the type command received in step S1901 is a big hit or a special miss result. ..
If there is no big hit or special deviation result in step S1902 (NO), the MPU 102 ends the execution of the display-side accessory drive process.
Further, if the result is a big hit or a special miss in step S1902 (YES), in step S1903, the MPU 102 draws a lottery as to whether or not to make one notification. In step S1903, the MPU 102 determines whether or not to perform one notification, and when to perform one notification, at what timing based on the value of the one-shot notification lottery counter.

The one-announcement lottery counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The one-announcement lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the one-announcement lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the work RAM 104.
Whether the MPU 102 makes one announcement based on the value of the one-announcement lottery counter stored in the buffer for the one-announcement lottery counter, and at what timing the first accessory 310 is driven to perform one announcement. , And its operation mode are drawn by lottery. Specifically, the MPU 102 obtains the value of the one-announcement lottery counter stored in the buffer for the one-announcement lottery counter, and compares this value with the one-announcement winning / failing table to make one announcement. Whether to perform the operation, at what timing the first accessory 310 is driven to perform one notification, and the operation mode (driving pattern) thereof are drawn by lottery. Using this one-announcement hit / fail table to draw and determine the drive pattern of the first accessory 310 is also referred to as "first accessory drive pattern determination process".
The one-issue notification pass / fail table is a table that stores the values of random numbers related to the one-issue notification lottery, and is stored in various table data storage areas 1033 of the program ROM 103.

In step S1904, the MPU 102 determines whether or not one notification has been won. If the one notification is not won in step S1904 (NO), the MPU 102 ends the execution of the display-side accessory drive process.
On the other hand, when the one notification is won in step S1904 (YES), the MPU 102 transmits the accessory operation start command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S1905. This accessory operation start command includes a timing for performing one notification and an operation mode of the first accessory 310, and the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 is based on the information included in the accessory operation start command. It is configured so that it is possible to recognize the timing of one notification and the operation mode of the first accessory 310. When the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 receives the accessory operation start command, the accessory operation start flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90.

<One-off notification pass / fail table>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a pass / fail table for one notification.
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 makes one notification by comparing the one-shot notification pass / fail table shown in FIG. 39 with the value of the one-shot notification lottery counter stored in the buffer for the one-shot notification lottery counter. Whether or not, and if so, at what timing the first accessory 310 is driven to perform one notification, and a lottery of the operation mode is executed.

In the one-shot notification pass / fail table, the result of the lottery for the occurrence of one notification of "missing" and "winning" (win / fail result), and in the case of "winning", at what timing the one notification is generated, in other words. Then, it has a timing for driving the first accessory 310 and an operation mode thereof. The value and number of random numbers stored in the one-shot notification hit / fail table are arbitrary, and the probability of winning one-shot notification is arbitrary.

<About the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process executed by the voice light emitting control device 90>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in order to drive the first accessory 310 determined by the accessory drive process. In this voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG. 40.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first accessory 310 by referring to the area indicating the accessory operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2001 that the value of the accessory operation start flag is 0 and does not drive the first accessory 310 (NO), the MPU 92 emits sound without executing the processing after step S2002. The side accessory drive execution process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2001 that the value of the accessory operation start flag is 1 and drives the first accessory 310 (YES), a notice display is being generated in step S2002. It is determined whether or not it is. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated by referring to the area indicating the advance notice display generating flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the advance notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the process after step S2003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2002 that the advance notice display is not occurring in step S2002 (NO), it determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven in step S2003. judge.
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the accessory driving flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when driving the first accessory 310, and sets the first accessory. After driving the object 310, the accessory driving flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2003 that the first accessory is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S2004.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2003 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S2004 whether or not it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC set in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0 based on the information on the occurrence timing of the one-shot notification included in the accessory operation start command. do. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94. When is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2004 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the step The voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process is terminated without executing the process after S2005.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2004 that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If this is the case, the accessory-driven execution process is executed in step S2005. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor based on the operation pattern based on the operation mode of the first accessory 310 determined in the process of FIG. 38. Then, the driving of the first accessory 310 is executed.

In step S2006, the bonus operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the bonus operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the drive of the first bonus 310 is completed.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the accessory drive execution process.
In step S2101 of the accessory drive execution process, the MPU 92 reads the operation pattern determined by the lottery from the data table of the RAM 94. In step S2102, the MPU 92 determines whether the first accessory 310 is at the origin position, in other words, whether the origin detection sensor 311 is ON.

If the origin detection sensor 311 is not turned on in step S2102 (NO), the MPU 92 executes the origin return process in step S2103. In this origin return process, the MPU 92 controls the driver of the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and rotationally drives the drive gear 310b until the origin detection sensor 311 is turned on to raise the first accessory 310. ..

In step S2102, when the first accessory 310 is in the origin position (YES), or when the origin return is completed in step S2103, the MPU 92 drives the first accessory in step S2104 based on the operation pattern. Specifically, in step S2104, the MPU 92 controls a driver for driving the LED built in the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a, the first accessory rotation motor, and the first accessory 310, and the figure shows the figure. The first accessory 310 is operated based on the drive pattern determined by the display side accessory drive process of 38.

In step S2105, the MPU 92 clears the accessory driving flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Specifically, the MPU 92 clears the accessory driving flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. After that, the MPU 92 ends the accessory drive execution process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in step S2002 of FIG. 40, it is determined whether or not the advance notice display is occurring, and when it is determined in step S2002 that the advance notice display is occurring (YES), By terminating the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the process after step S2003, the touch sensor 57 can be suitably detected. In other words, the touch sensor 57 can detect the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and prevent the player from performing unintended control.
Normally, since the operation position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. The accessory 310 is arranged. Therefore, even though the player is not operating, the first accessory 310 operates while the touch sensor 57 is being operated, so that the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first accessory 310 and the player However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is a risk of dissatisfaction due to the execution of unintended control, for example, an effect such as a notice effect or a one-shot announcement. Therefore, the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

<Game flow>
FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 10. When the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the game is started from the first mode M1. The "first mode" (normal mode) is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low-probability mode and there is no support mode in the gaming state. In the first mode M1, by inserting the game ball into the first starting port 36, the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

If the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the second mode M2 (takeoff mode). The "second mode" is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and there is no support mode in the gaming state. The second mode M2 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode continues until the next big hit.

In addition, if the "explicit small round high accuracy result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the third mode M3 (flight mode). The "third mode" is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit on the number of times. The third mode M3 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big hit.

Further, if the "most advantageous result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). The "fourth mode" is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit on the number of times. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big hit. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of effects MA to MC (three types in the first embodiment) having different effects as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

In the first embodiment, during the production of the opening / closing execution mode of the "most advantageous result", more specifically, during the round game, the effect type selection effect of selecting the effect type in the fourth mode M4 is executed, and the fourth mode. An image for selecting the effect of the mode M4 is displayed on the display screen G. When the player operates the operation button 28 and selects a favorite effect from the effects MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the effect in the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the game of "most advantageous result" is selected. It will be a directed production. Since the next big hit is promised in the fourth mode M4, the fourth mode M4 continues until the next big hit.

Further, if the "low probability result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the fifth mode M5 (revenge mode). The "fifth mode" is a game state mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode up to a limit of 100 times. In the 5th mode M5, the next big hit is not guaranteed, and if the support mode wins the big hit again by the limit of 100 times, the revenge will be successful, but the support mode will be up to the limit of 100 times. If the jackpot is not won again, the revenge fails, the high frequency support ends, and the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the first mode M1 having no support mode.

The game flow shown in FIG. 42 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all the game flows of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. For example, in the first embodiment, the mode transition is not performed for the special deviation result (small hit result), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the “special deviation result (small hit result)”. , "Special off result" does not trigger the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode, but it does trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it may be configured to shift to the mode when the "special out-of-order result" is won.

<Example of staging image>
Next, the effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with an example. When the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the fluctuation display is performed in the main display unit 46. As described above, the main display unit 46 The display area of is set to be extremely small, and it is difficult for a player who is paying attention to various effects performed by the symbol display device 51 to easily recognize each information in the lit state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. 3, a variable display effect using a decorative figure as an effect symbol is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Note that the background image is not shown in FIG. 43.

<Before fluctuation display>
FIG. 43 (A): In the state before the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large column of decorative figures, which is an effect pattern, is displayed in the screen of the display screen G. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decorative drawings of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are also in a state of being stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Start of variable display production>
FIG. 43 (B): The fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen of the display screen G in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1. That is, in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, each decorative figure of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the display screen G to produce a variable display effect. Is started. In FIG. 43, the variable display of each symbol display column Z1 to Z3 is indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, the individual staging symbols are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the image (background image) that is the background of the staging symbols is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Will be done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape such as a town, the sea, or a mountain. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the staging is, for example, the "first mode". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "first mode" is a gaming state (normal mode) in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode. In addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with various effect modes, and different background images are prepared for each effect mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal difference between the "win / fail lottery mode" and the "support mode". Although not particularly shown in FIG. 43, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a specific character, item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z1>
FIG. 43 (C): When a predetermined time (for example, about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the symbol display column Z1 first stops the fluctuation display. In this example, it means that the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
FIG. 43 (D): Following the symbol display column Z1, the symbol display column Z3 stops the variable display. In this example, it means that the decorative figure representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear in appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "sliding pattern" is, for example, once a decorative figure representing the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the symbol display column slides by one symbol and the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed. By doing so, it develops into reach. Alternatively, once the decorative drawing representing the number "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative drawing slides in the opposite direction by one symbol and the decorative drawing representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed, thereby reaching the reach. A pattern that develops is also conceivable. In addition, after a temporary stop display of an effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is displayed, a character appears on the screen and the variable display of the symbol display column Z3 is restarted. A pattern in which the decorative figure representing "8" is stopped and displayed and develops into reach is also conceivable.

<Stop display effect>
FIG. 43 (E): The last symbol display column Z2 stops the variable display in synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the mode of non-winning (missing), the combination of non-winning (missing) is also stopped and displayed in the decorative drawing. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 43 (E), it is shown that the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and in this case, the combination of the decorative drawings is "8.1".・ Because it is a misalignment of "3", it is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the normal "missing" in this fluctuation.

As described above, with reference to FIG. 43, an example of the variation display and the stop display (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the decorative drawing for each variation has been described. Through the effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the player is expected to win or miss the big hit, and finally the result of the internal lottery is clearly taught in the effect. Can be done.

<Example of variable display effect>
44 and 45 show the case where the big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery in the first mode M1 (the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and there is no support mode), and the result is sorted to the “most advantageous result” ( It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the production C executed in the so-called first hit). In the following description, the description of matters common to the above-mentioned production example will be omitted. Note that the background image is not shown in FIGS. 44 and 45.

<Before the start of variable display production>
FIG. 44 (A): The symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in large size on the display screen G. In each of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3, the combination of decorative figures representing the numbers "9, 1, 3" is stopped and displayed.

<Start of variable display production>
FIG. 44 (B): The variable display effect is started by scrolling the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z1>
FIG. 44 (C): The symbol display column Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 44 (C), the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
FIG. 44 (D): The symbol display column Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 44 (D), the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display effect>
FIG. 44 (E): The symbol display column Z2 is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Normally, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, the decorative figure, which is an effect symbol displayed on the display screen G, is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. However, in FIG. 44 (E), the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "most advantageous result", and the decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display column Z2.

<Direction in open / close execution mode>
When the combination of the jackpot decorations is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the open / close execution mode is set, and the effect of the open / close execution mode according to the lottery result of the jackpot is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, the effect C is executed as an effect of the opening / closing execution mode of the "most advantageous result" which is the result of the internal lottery.

FIG. 45 (F): The opening effect is executed when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In this opening effect, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is greatly changed, and the character image G1 such as "BONUS!" Is displayed on the display screen G in a large size, and the player wins the jackpot. Be notified. If the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won, the player may be notified by another mode (for example, voice output).

FIG. 45 (G): Next, in order to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed, for example, a character image G2 of "Right-handed!" And a right-pointing arrow are displayed large on the display screen G. The arrow. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed on the right side of the character image G3 of "Right-handed!" So that the right-handed game is emphasized. Further, in accordance with the notification of the right-handed game on the display screen G, for example, the voice of "Right-handed!" Is output from the speaker unit 24. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable winning device 38 is provided on the right side of the game board 31, and in order to make the game ball win in the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38, the firing handle 27 The rotation operation amount is maximized, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 31R is shifted from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side of the opposite side (so-called right-handed strike). As shown in FIG. 45 (G), the player is notified that the right-handed game is to be performed. The right-pointing arrow and the character image G3 of "Right-handed!" May be displayed so as to flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. As a result, even a player who cannot understand Japanese can intuitively understand that he / she plays a right-handed game. Further, in the following description, the right-handed navigation which is a suggestion of the right-handed game in the big hit game state is also referred to as a right-handed navigation for the big hit game.

FIG. 45 (H): Following the opening effect, an effect of a situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed is executed. In this production, for example, a battle production is performed. This battle effect is performed for the purpose of notifying the player that the character on the player side and the enemy character battle and win the battle to shift to the high probability mode after the big hit game. Further, on the upper end side of the display screen G, a plurality of characters "right-handed" and a plurality of right-pointing arrows "→" are displayed to indicate that the right-handed game is to be continued. Further, the character "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow "→" may be displayed so as to flow from the left end to the right end of the display screen G.

FIG. 45 (I): Further, during the effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, the effect type for allowing the player to select the effect mode after the end of the open / close execution mode described in step S1413 of FIG. 30. The selection effect is executed. In this effect type selection effect, the player presses down the left direction button 282 and / or the right direction button 283 of the operation button 28, and prefers from the images GA to GC indicating the effect type displayed on the display screen G. Select an image that shows the type of effect. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (I), the image GA is an image representing the effect MA, the image GB is an image representing the effect MB, and the image GC is an image representing the effect MC. When the player presses down the operation button 28 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other unselected images and is selected. Is configured to be explicitly stated. When the player selects a desired effect and then presses down the decision button 281 of the operation button 28, the effect corresponding to the selected image is confirmed as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

In the first embodiment, if the player does not select and determine the desired effect within a predetermined time, specifically, by the final round, the 15th round, the effect determined in advance by the initial setting (the first). In one embodiment, the effect MA) is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. If the player does not select and confirm the effect mode within a predetermined time, the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G after the predetermined time has elapsed is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect MB corresponding to the selected image GB (the image GB displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G) is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. To.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 45 (I), the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other images, but the player can use the left direction button 282 of the operation button 28 and the left direction button 282. / Or when the right direction button 283 is pressed down, the images GA to GC corresponding to the effects MA to MC may be moved to the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (J), since the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, the image GB is arranged in the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (J), the image GB being selected is arranged in the center of the display screen G in order to clearly show the selected image to the player, and other images are selected. The image GB is displayed on the outermost surface by displaying (superimposing) on the non-image GA and GC, and it is clearly shown that the image GB is selected. In addition, in order to show the selected image more clearly to the player, the selected image GB may be displayed larger than the other unselected images GA and GC.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (J), the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed as a gauge. For example, a gauge image G4 showing the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is displayed below the image GB, the remaining time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is shown in red, and the gauge image G4 is shown with the passage of time. The red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 45 (J)) is reduced, specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion) becomes with the passage of time. It may be configured to move to the left side toward the display screen G. Further, the red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 45 (J)) of the gauge image G4 increases with the passage of time, specifically, the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion). The boundary line L1 of the above may be configured to move to the right side toward the display screen G with the passage of time. Further, details of the selected effect, for example, an explanation of what kind of effect the selected effect is, may be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the attribute information (metadata) in which each effect content is described is stored in the ROM 93 or the like, and the MPU 92 stores the attribute information (meta data) of the selected effect based on the operation signal of the operation button 28 in the ROM 93. Read from, and send a command instructing the display control device 100 to display the read attribute information on the display screen G. Further, the attribute information of the effect is stored in the effect data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103, and the attribute information (meta) of the effect being selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 based on the operation signal of the operation button 28. You may send a command instructing the display control device 100 to read the data) from the effect data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103 and display it on the display screen G. Further, the music used in the selected effect may be output from the speaker unit 24. At this time, the music output in the current production is temporarily stopped, and the music used in the selected production is output from the speaker unit 24. In this way, by presenting the details of the selected effect to the player, the player can easily select the effect that suits his / her taste, and the interest is enhanced.

<Production type (type) selection process>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type (type) selection process. As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process of FIG. 30. In this effect type selection process, as shown in FIG. 46, the MPU 92 causes the player to select the effect type to be executed in the fourth mode M4 by executing steps S2201 to S2208.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the opening command. The MPU 92 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S2202 is executed. For example, when the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S2202 is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of times the process of step S2202 is executed and reaches 5000 times, when 10 sec has elapsed. judge. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). When it is determined in step S2202 that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the reception of the opening command (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

Further, when the predetermined time has elapsed in step S2202 (YES), the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so as to start the effect type selection effect in step S2203. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on the instruction from the MPU 92, and displays the image of the effect for selecting the effect type on the display screen G. As described above, there are three different types of staging for selecting the staging type, which is the fourth mode M4 staging that shifts to the player when the player wins a big hit in the winning / failing lottery and is assigned to the "most advantageous result". The effect type mode is selected and confirmed from MA, MB, and MC. The player operates the operation button 28 in this effect type selection effect to select and confirm the desired effect mode.

In step S2204, the MPU 92 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 28 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 282 and / or the right-direction button 283 of the operation button 28, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S2204, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so that when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. do. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so that when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so that when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S2205, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player operates the operation button 28 to confirm the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the decision button 281 is accepted. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2205 that the pressing operation of the decision button 281 has been accepted (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, in step S2205, when the confirmation operation is accepted in the state where the image GA is selected, the MPU 92 shifts the effect MA after the first mode M1 in the step S2206 of the fourth mode M4. Set as a production. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S2205, when the confirmation operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MB after the first mode M1 in step S2206. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S2205, when the confirmation operation is accepted with the image GC selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MC after the first mode M1 in step S2206. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

Further, when it is determined in step S2205 that the pressing operation of the decision button 281 is not accepted (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S2207 whether the predetermined time has elapsed. The MPU 92 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S2207 is executed. For example, when the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S2207 is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of times the process of step S2207 is executed and reaches 5000 times, and 10 sec has elapsed. judge. Further, the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

When the predetermined time has elapsed in step S2207 (YES), the MPU 92 uses the effect (in the first embodiment, the effect MA) predetermined by the initial setting as the effect in the fourth mode M4 in step S2208. Set. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94 as an effect of the fourth mode M4. As described above, in step S2207, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. good.

If the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S2207 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

<Other examples of staging type selection processing>
Instead of measuring the predetermined time in steps S2202 and S2207 of FIG. 46, the determination process of S2202 and step S2207 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be counted based on the number of received open commands and round start commands (hereinafter, also referred to as open commands) in step S1005 in FIG. 23. In this case, in step S2202, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like is 3 (third round), and if the number of received open commands and the like is 3, the effect type selection effect of step S2203 is performed. In step S2207, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like is 15 (the 15th round, which is the final round), and if the number of received open commands and the like is 15, step S2208. You may set the effect of the initial setting of.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart in another example of the effect type selection process. As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process of FIG. 30. In this effect type selection process, as shown in FIG. 47, the MPU 92 causes the player to select the effect type to be executed in the fourth mode M4 by executing steps S2301 to S2315.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 92 sets a counter in step S2302 to measure the number of open commands and the like received after receiving the opening command. ..

In step S2302, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the gaming state is the third round of the jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter each time the opening command or the like is received, and determines whether or not the number of receiving the opening command or the like is 3 (third round). When it is determined in step S2303 that the number of received open commands or the like is not 3 or more (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

Further, when the number of received open commands and the like is 3 or more in step S2303 (YES), the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so as to start the effect type selection effect in step S2304. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on the instruction from the MPU 92 to display an image of the effect for selecting the effect type, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 45 (I) on the display screen G. Display on.

In step S2305, the MPU 92 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 28 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 282 and / or the right-direction button 283 of the operation button 28, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S2305, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so that when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. do. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so that when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so that when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S2306, the MPU 92 determines whether the player operates the operation button 28 to confirm the effect, that is, whether the pressing operation of the decision button 281 is accepted. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the pressing operation of the decision button 281 has been accepted (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. That is, in step S2306, when the confirmation operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MA after the first mode M1 in step S2307. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S2306, when the confirmation operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MB after the first mode M1 in step S2307. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S2306, when the confirmation operation is accepted with the image GC selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MC after the first mode M1 in step S2307. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

The MPU 92 determines in step S2308 whether or not a release command or the like has been received. If it is determined in step S2308 that the release command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S2308 that the release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2309 whether or not the gaming state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter each time it receives a release command or the like, and has the number of received open commands or the like reached 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round? Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S2309 that the number of received open commands and the like is not 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (NO), the MPU 92 cancels the determined effect for the player in step S2310. Instruct to give a notification to confirm. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 so as to display a character image confirming whether to cancel the confirmed effect such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on the instruction from the MPU 92, and displays a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. Further, the MPU 92 controls so that the voice of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker unit 24. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice of "Cancel the effect?" Stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93, and puts it in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. Set and control the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker unit 24. If it is determined in step S2309 that the number of received open commands and the like is 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (YES), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect process.

In step S2311, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the effect determined in step S2306 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the player's operation button 28. If it is determined in step S2311 that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 92 returns to the operation of step S2305. If it is determined in step S2311 that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect process.

Further, when it is determined in step S2306 that the pressing operation of the decision button 281 is not accepted (NO), the MPU 92 determines whether or not the release command or the like has been received in step S2312. If it is determined in step S2312 that the release command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S2312 that the release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2313 whether the gaming state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter each time it receives a release command or the like, and has the number of received open commands or the like reached 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round? Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S2313 that it is the 15th round (YES), the MPU 92 performs the effect (in the first embodiment, the effect MA) predetermined by the initial setting in the fourth mode M4 in step S2314. Set as a production. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 94 as an effect of the fourth mode M4. If it is determined in step S2313 that it is the final round (15th round) (YES), the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. When the effect is set in step S2314, the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is not determined in step S2313 that it is the final round (15th round) (NO), the MPU 92 instructs the player to notify the player to select and confirm the effect in step S2315. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the display control device 100 so as to display a character image prompting the selection / confirmation of the effect such as "determine the effect!" Or "determine the effect!" On the display screen G. Control. In the display control device 100, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 based on the instruction from the MPU 92, and the display screen G displays "determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!", Etc. Display a character image that prompts you to select and confirm. Further, the MPU 92 controls so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker unit 24. Specifically, the MPU 92 obtains sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Stored in the common ROM 96 of the ROM 93. It is read out and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that voices such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker unit 24.

It should be noted that the timing at which the effect type selection effect is started is arbitrary, and for example, the number of received open commands and the like may be 1 (1st round) or more and 15 or less (15th round). Further, the number of rounds for starting the effect type selection effect may be randomly determined using a counter stored in the RAM 94. Further, in the above explanation, the effect can be canceled according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled up to the 14th round), but the predetermined time and the predetermined number of rounds elapse. It may be configured so that the production can be canceled.

<Direction transition process>
Next, the process of shifting to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" will be described. Normally, when a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery, the effect of the opening / closing execution mode according to the distribution result is executed, and after the ending period ends, the effect of the next mode is started. However, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result", the effect C of the opening / closing execution mode according to the most advantageous result is executed. Then, the production of the fourth mode M4 is started during the ending period of the production C.

Specifically, it is controlled so that the output of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is started during the ending period of the production C corresponding to the most advantageous result. In the first embodiment, the timing for starting the output of music and sound from the speaker unit 24 changes according to the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46. In the following description, in the production of the fourth mode M4, the music production is referred to as a music production, and the video production displayed on the display screen G is also referred to as a video production.

Hereinafter, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 48. In the first embodiment, there are three types of staging of the fourth mode M4, the staging MA to MC, and the transition process is different for each staging MA to MC. Hereinafter, the details of the transition process of each effect MA to MC will be described. In the following description, the right-handed navigation that suggests a right-handed game at the time of transition to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) is also referred to as a right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Transition process to staging MA>
First, a case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the staging MA, the output of the intro part of the music used in the staging MA of the fourth mode M4 starts from the speaker unit 24 from T1 at the start of the ending period of the staging C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". It is controlled to be. Here, in the staging MA, the ending period of the staging C and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the staging MA of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends at T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the staging MA, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound of “ARUSH rush” during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "A RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW1, and the audio output of "A RUSH rush" is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW1 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "ARUSH rush" from the ending period or the output period of the intro portion. For example, if the ending period or the output period of the intro portion is 10 sec and the output time of the voice of "ARUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW1 is 8 sec. In this case, it is controlled so that the output of the voice of "ARUSH rush" is started 8 seconds after T1 at the start of the ending period.

At the end of the ending period, the voice of "right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at T2, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the “right-handed” voice is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video effect of the effect MA is controlled to start. At the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Be controlled.

<Transition process to staging MB>
Next, a case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the staging MB, the output of the intro part of the music used in the staging MB of the fourth mode M4 starts from the speaker unit 24 from T1 at the start of the ending period of the staging C corresponding to the “most advantageous result”. It is controlled to be. Here, in the staging MB, the period of the intro part of the music used in the staging MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the staging C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the staging MB, the speaker unit 24 is controlled to output the sound of “BRUSH rush” during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "B RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW2, and the audio output of "B RUSH rush" is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW2 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "BRUSH rush" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, when the output period of the intro portion is 11 sec and the output time of the voice of "BRUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW2 is 9 sec. In this case, it is controlled so that the output of the voice of "BRUSH rush" is started 9 seconds after T1 at the start of the ending period.

Here, in this transition process to the effect MB, the sound of "BRUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 over T2 at the end of the ending period. Therefore, when the voice of "right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at the end of the ending period, the voice of "BRUSH rush" and the voice of "right-handed" are output in an overlapping manner. Will be done. Therefore, in this transition process to the staging MB, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game are displayed at T2 at the end of the ending period without outputting the voice of "Right-handed". Is displayed on the display screen G, and is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH starts. That is, the display of characters such as "Please hit right" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video effect of the effect MB is controlled to be started.

<Transition process to staging MC>
Next, a case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the staging MC, the output of the intro part of the music used in the staging MC of the fourth mode M4 starts from the speaker unit 24 from T1 at the start of the ending period of the staging C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". It is controlled to be. Here, in the staging MC, the period of the intro part of the music used in the staging MC of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period of the staging C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends before T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the staging MC, the sound of "CRUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "C RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW3, and the audio output of "C RUSH rush" is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW3 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "CRUSH rush" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, when the output period of the intro portion is 6 sec and the output time of the voice of "CRUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW3 is 4 sec. In this case, it is controlled so that the output of the voice of "CRUSH rush" is started 4 seconds after T1 at the start of the ending period.

In addition, in the staging MC, following the output of the voice of "CRUSH rush", the voice of "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game is output, and at the same time as T2 at the end of the ending period or omitted. At the same time, the output of the "Please hit right" voice is controlled to end. In other words, the voice output time of "Please hit right" is the time obtained by subtracting the output period of the intro part from the ending period. Further, in the transition process to the staging MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. It is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH starts.

<Production data>
Next, the data used for the process of shifting to the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. The music data and the voice data used in each of the effects MA to MC of the fourth mode M4 are stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 of the voice emission control device 90 as sequence data, parameter data and sound data as described with reference to FIG. 28, respectively. It is stored. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C used in the staging MA to MC, and the common ROM 96 is used in the staging MA to MC, respectively. Sound data corresponding to the music data A to C to be performed is stored. Then, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the sequence data and the parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C from the ROM 93 and the sound data from the common ROM 96 and output the sound data from the speaker unit 24 as needed. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI95, and the music data A to C are output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be.

Here, the music data A is associated with the effect MA, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC by the data table stored in the ROM 93. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 outputs the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A to the ROM 93 and It is read from the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MB, the MPU 92 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B with the ROM 93. It is read from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MC, the MPU 92 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C with the ROM 93. It is read from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24.

In addition, the music data A to C have an intro part (prelude), an A melody part (the first melody of the song), a B melody part (the melody that comes after the A melody), a chorus part (chorus), an interlude, and an out mouth, respectively. It is composed of multiple sections such as (sequel). An example of a general music composition is shown below. The following Examples A and B are merely examples, and the composition of the music used in the first embodiment is not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → A melody → B melody → chorus → interlude → A melody → B melody → chorus → interlude → C melody → chorus → outro Example B) Intro → A melody → B melody → chorus → interlude → B melody → chorus → C melody → outro

Further, the common ROM 96 and the ROM 93 store the voice data A to E and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to FIG. 48, respectively. Here, the voice data A to C and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 are associated with each other. The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the voice data stored in the common ROM 96 and output it from the speaker unit 24 as needed. Here, the voice data A is "A RUSH rush" and the voice data B is. "B RUSH rush", voice data C is "C RUSH rush", voice data D is "right-handed", and voice data E is "right-handed" as voice data.

Further, the ROM 93 stores the time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. 48. The MPU 92 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 93 when determining whether or not the ending period has ended.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 93, the audio data A is associated with the effect MA, the audio data B is associated with the effect MB, and the audio data C is associated with the effect MC. Further, the audio data D is associated with the effect MA, and the audio data E is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 reads out the audio data A and the audio data D and outputs them from the speaker unit 24. Controls the sound output LSI 95. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data A and the voice data D are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the voice data A and the voice data D are set. Controls the sound output LSI 95 so that is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24.
Further, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the audio data B and output it from the speaker unit 24 when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MB. do. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data B are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the voice data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. ) Is controlled by the sound output LSI 95.
Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MC, the MPU 92 sounds to read out the voice data C and the voice data E and output them from the speaker unit 24. Controls the output LSI 95. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data C and the voice data E are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the voice data C and the voice data E are set. Controls the sound output LSI 95 so that is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24.

The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the sound data corresponding to the voice data A to C from the common ROM 96 and output the sound data from the speaker unit 24 based on the voice start times TW1 to TW3. Specifically, when the MPU 92 outputs the voice data A, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data A after the voice start time TW1 elapses from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 48). Is read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to output the data from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the MPU 92 outputs the voice data B, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data B are stored in the ROM 93 and the sound data after the voice start time TW2 elapses from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 48). The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to read data from the common ROM 96 and output data from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the MPU 92 outputs the voice data C, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data C are stored in the ROM 93 and after the voice start time TW3 elapses from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 48). The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to read data from the common ROM 96 and output data from the speaker unit 24.

Further, the video data used in each effect of the fourth mode M4 is stored in the effect data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103 included in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Specifically, the video data A to D are stored in the effect data storage area 1031. The MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read out the video data stored in the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G in accordance with the instruction from the MPU 92.

Here, the video data A is associated with the staging MA, the video data B is associated with the staging MB, and the video data C is associated with the staging MC by the data table. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MA, the MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data A and display it on the display screen G. .. Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MB, the MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data B and display it on the display screen G. Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MC, the MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data C and display it on the display screen G.

Further, the video data D is image data for right-handed navigation for RUSH. The MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G when performing the right-handed navigation for RUSH. When the video data D for right-handed navigation for RUSH is stored in the character ROM 106 and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is performed, the MPU 102 reads the video data D from the character ROM 106 and displays it on the display screen G. You may instruct.

<Transition process to the 4th mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the voice emission control device 90 for the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to FIG. 48 will be described. In this effect mode transition process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2401 to S2406 as shown in FIG. 49.

In step S2401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S2401 that the ending command has been received (YES), the MPU 92 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 in step S2402. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 based on the type of the flag set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S2206 or step S2208 of FIG. Further, in step S2401, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection process.

When the determination result of step S2402 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes the transition process to the effect MA in step S2403. The process of shifting to the staging MA in step S2403 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. Further, when the determination result of step S2402 is the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes the transition process to the effect MB in step S2404. The process of shifting to the effect MB in step S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. Further, when the determination result in step S2402 is the staging MC, the MPU 92 executes the transition process to the staging MC in step S2405. The process of shifting to the staging MC in step S2405 will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S2406, the MPU 92 clears the flags set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S2206 or step S2208 of FIG.

<Transition process to staging MA>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MA in step S2403 of FIG. 49 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MA is set. In the transition process to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S2501 to S2508 as shown in FIG.

In step S2501, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S2504 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and "2 sec" is set for TW1, the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "1000" as the standby time (standby period) for TW1. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2502, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S2506, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2503, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the staging MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A for the effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data A is the speaker. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be output from the unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A is started from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2504, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the voice start time TW1 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2501. When the MPU 92 determines that the sound start time TW1 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound for the effect MA in step S2505. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data A “A RUSH rush” for the effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice data A is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data A "A RUSH rush" is started from the speaker unit 24. Further, when it is determined in step S2504 that the voice start time TW1 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the effect MA.

In step S2506, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2502. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S2507. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D “right-handed” for the effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data D is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "right-handed" is started from the speaker unit 24, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. Further, when it is determined in step S2506 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the staging MA.

In step S2508, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data A from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105.

The configuration for measuring the time of step S2504 and step S2506 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to staging MB>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MB in step S2404 of FIG. 49 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MB is set. In the transition process to the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2608 as shown in FIG. 51.

In step S2601, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S2604 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and "3 sec" is set for TW2, the MPU 92 sets "1500" as the standby time (standby period) for TW2 in the timer counter. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2602, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S2606 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2603, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the staging MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B for the production MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data B is the speaker. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be output from the unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B is started from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2604, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the voice start time TW2 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2601. When the MPU 92 determines that the sound start time TW2 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound for the effect MB in step S2605. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data B “B RUSH rush” for the effect MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice data B is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data B “B RUSH rush” is started from the speaker unit 24. Further, when it is determined in step S2604 that the voice start time TW2 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the effect MB.

In step S2606, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2602. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the striking navigation in step S2607. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. Further, when it is determined in step S2606 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the staging MB.

In step S2608, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data B from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105.

The configuration for measuring the time of step S2604 and step S2606 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to staging MC>
Next, the process of shifting to the staging MC in step S2405 of FIG. 49 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MC is set. In this transition process to the staging MC, the MPU 92 executes steps S2701 to S2708 as shown in FIG. 52.

In step S2701, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S2704 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW3 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and "1 sec" is set for TW3, the MPU 92 sets "500" as the standby time (standby period) for TW3 in the timer counter. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2702, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S2706, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2703, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the staging MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the production MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data C is the speaker. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be output from the unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C is started from the speaker unit 24.

In step S2704, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the voice start time TW3 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2701. When the MPU 92 determines that the sound start time TW3 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 92 starts outputting the sound for the effect MC in step S2705. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data C “CRUSH rush” for the effect MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the voice data C is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data C “CRUSH rush” is started from the speaker unit 24.

Further, in step S2705, after the output of the audio data C “CRUSH rush” for the effect MC, the MPU 92 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data E “Please hit right” with the ROM 93. It is read from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data E is output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data E "Please hit right" is started from the speaker unit 24. The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the voice data C "C RUSH rush" is output and then the voice data E "Please hit right" is output. Therefore, from the speaker unit 24, after the voice of "CRUSH rush" is output, the voice of "Please hit right" is continuously output. Further, when it is determined in step S2704 that the voice start time TW3 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the staging MC.

In step S2706, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2702. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the striking navigation in step S2707. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. Further, when it is determined in step S2706 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 ends the transition process to the staging MC.

In step S2708, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data C from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105.

The configuration for measuring the time of step S2704 and step S2706 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

In the first embodiment, the transition process to each effect MA to MC has been described assuming that the effect types of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are the effect MA, MB, and MC, but the fourth mode M4 The type of effect is not limited to the above three types, and may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four or more types.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57) that accepts a player's operation by detecting the presence or absence of an object (for example, a player's hand or arm) in the first range AR1. , Voice emission control device 90), special effect execution means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and the operation of the first accessory 310. A movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90) for controlling is provided, and the movable accessory control means is characterized in that the operation of the first accessory 310 is stopped during the operation acceptance period of the player.

According to the above configuration, by not operating the movable accessory during the operation reception of the player by the operation reception means, it is possible to prevent the malfunction due to the movable accessory and suppress the player's unintended control. can. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(2) When the operation reception means of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment accepts the operation of the player, the operation reception status storage unit (various flag storage areas) displays information indicating that the operation reception period of the player is in progress. ), The movable accessory control means is characterized in that the operation of the movable accessory is stopped during the operation acceptance period of the player with reference to the operation reception state storage unit.

According to the above configuration, the operation reception means stores information indicating that the player is in the operation reception period in the operation reception state storage unit, and the movable accessory control means refers to the operation reception state storage unit. Since it is determined whether the player is in the operation acceptance period, a simple configuration that only confirms the presence or absence of the flag prevents malfunctions due to movable accessories and suppresses unintended control by the player. can do. In addition, since it is not necessary to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the player is in the operation acceptance period, it is possible to implement a function to prevent the operation acceptance means from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. can.

(3) When the operation reception period of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment ends, the operation reception means clears the information indicating that the operation reception period of the player stored in the operation reception status storage unit is in progress. It is characterized by doing.

According to the above configuration, when the operation reception period of the player ends, the operation reception means clears the information indicating that the operation reception period of the player is being stored in the operation reception status storage unit, so that the player can use the operation reception means. After the operation acceptance period is over, the movable accessory can be operated to produce the effect. For this reason, the player can enjoy the production by the movable character, and the taste is improved.

[Second Embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment depends on the movable accessory by prohibiting the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, during the period (operation acceptance period) in which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted. It prevents the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning. The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment does not perform a notice display lottery while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating, in other words, does not execute a special effect by operating the touch sensor 57. This prevents the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to a movable accessory. In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described, but the same components as those described in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and duplicated description will be omitted.

<Determining the production pattern>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process of the second embodiment.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process of FIG. In the process of determining the effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display, and also determines the content of the notice display (including the presence / absence and result of the notification) and the timing at which the notice display is generated. To set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the operation notice part described later to suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, in other words, the notice display is executed. It does not suggest to the player that the form of notifying the player to do so (hereinafter, also referred to as the notification display with notification) and the operation notice part described later are executed and the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It has a form, in other words, a form in which notification of executing the notice display is not performed (hereinafter, also referred to as a notice-less notice display).

Further, in the following description, among the notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process, only the notice display related to the touch sensor 57 will be described, and the description of the other notice displays will be omitted. In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery for whether or not to generate another notice display. However, the touch sensor Only the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display related to 57 may be executed.

In step S2801, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. In step S2801, when the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the process of determining the effect pattern.

On the other hand, in step S2801, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), in step S2802, the MPU 92 executes the notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display. The MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display by using the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94.

The notice display lottery counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery (notice display lottery) as to whether or not to generate a notice display based on the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the buffer for the notice display lottery counter. Specifically, whether or not the MPU 92 generates the notice display by acquiring the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer and comparing this value with the notice display table. Execute the lottery. The notice display table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice display, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the notice display table is a table referred to when a lottery for the presence / absence of a notice display is performed with respect to the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display table has a plurality of distribution results of "notified no result", "notified noticed result", and "notified no noticed result" as distribution destinations. For example, in the notice display table, among the values "0 to 19" of the notice display lottery counter, "0 to 9" (probability 1/2) is assigned to "no notice result", and "10 to 14" (probability 1). / 4) is assigned to "Notified result with notice", and "15-19" (probability 1/4) is assigned to "Result without notice".

In step S2803, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the notice display lottery has been won in step S2802. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2803 that the notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S2804.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2803 that the notice display is generated (YES), in step S2804, the operation notice part described later is executed and the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is determined whether or not to suggest to the player to hold the hand over the position, in other words, whether or not to notify that the notice display is executed. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2804 that the notification is to be performed (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notification presence notice display setting process in step S2805. In this notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of the notification (with notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310. Further, the MPU 92 is set to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , The result of the notice display may be determined by setting so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed on the display screen G.

Further, in step S2805, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing at which the notice display is generated as the waiting time (waiting period) for the notification presence notice display generation timing in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so that the waiting time for the notification display occurrence timing is 1 sec. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notice display is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2804 that the notification is not performed (NO), the MPU 92 executes the notification non-notification display setting process in step S2806. In this notification non-notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of notification (no notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310. Further, the MPU 92 is set to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , The result of the notice display may be determined by setting so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed on the display screen G.

Further, in step S2806, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing at which the notice display is generated as the standby time (standby period) for the timing for generating the notification no notice display in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so that the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing is 1 sec. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notification no notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". In this case, the result of the notice display is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is increased, and the winning / failing result is "big hit winning". If it is determined that this is not the case, the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven may be lowered, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", it increases the probability of setting the display screen G to display the school of fish or bubbles, and determines that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". If this is the case, the probability of setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles may be lowered, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.

In step S2807, the MPU 92 sets the advance notice winning flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the notice display is generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Then, when the result of the advance notice display is notified, the MPU 92 clears the advance notice winning flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

In the above description, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory driving flag, and if there is an accessory driving flag, the MPU 92 determines the effect pattern without performing the processing after step S2802. To finish. However, if the notice display lottery in step S2802 is won, the notice display process is performed, but if the notice display process is not performed, the notice display process is not performed. Therefore, in the determination of winning the notice display in step S2803, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory driving flag when the lottery process is won, and when there is an accessory driving flag, the processing after step S2804. The MPU 92 may end the process of determining the effect pattern without performing the above.

Further, in the above description, when it is determined in step S2803 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the operation notice part described later is executed in step S2804 to move the hand to the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is decided by a distribution lottery whether or not to suggest to the player to hold the player, in other words, whether or not to notify the player to execute the notice display. In other words, it is decided by a distribution lottery whether the notice given at the same timing is notified or not.
However, the notice of "notification" that suggests to the player that the player is to hold his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 by executing the operation notice part described later, and the hand is held over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is also possible to give a notice of "no notification" that does not suggest this to the player at different timings.
In this case, a lottery as to whether or not to give a notice of "notification available" suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the display screen G, and suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. A lottery will be held at each timing as to whether or not to give a notice of "no notification".

As described above, in the present embodiment, in step S2801 of FIG. 53, it is determined whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven, and if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES). By ending the effect pattern determination process without executing the process after step S2801, the touch sensor 57 can be suitably detected. In other words, the touch sensor 57 can detect the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and prevent the player from performing unintended control.
Normally, since the operation position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. The accessory 310 is arranged. Therefore, even though the player is not operating, the first accessory 310 operates while the touch sensor 57 is being operated, so that the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first accessory 310 and the player However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is a risk of dissatisfaction due to the execution of unintended control, for example, an effect such as a notice effect or a one-shot announcement. Therefore, the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

<About the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process executed by the voice light emitting control device 90>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process of the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, during the period in which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted (operation acceptance period), the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is prohibited, so that the touch sensor 57 by the movable accessory is prohibited. Although malfunction is prevented, in this second embodiment, the advance notice display lottery is not performed while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating, in other words, it is special by operating the touch sensor 57. By not executing the effect, the touch sensor 57 is prevented from malfunctioning due to a movable accessory. Therefore, when driving the first accessory 310, the notice display does not occur, and it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the notice display is occurring. Hereinafter, the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in order to drive the first accessory 310 determined by the accessory drive process. In this voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG. 54.

In step S2901, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first accessory 310 by referring to the area indicating the first accessory drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2901 that the first accessory 310 is not driven (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S2902.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2901 that the first accessory 310 is driven (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2902 whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. ..
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the accessory driving flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when driving the first accessory 310, and sets the first accessory. After driving the object 310, the accessory driving flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2902 that the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S2903.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2902 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S2903 whether or not it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94. When is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2903 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the step The voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process is terminated without executing the process after S2904.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2903 that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If this is the case, the accessory-driven execution process is executed in step S2904. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the display-side accessory drive process of FIG. 38, and the first The accessory 310 is driven.

In step S2905, the bonus operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the bonus operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the drive of the first bonus 310 is completed. Since the accessory-driven execution process in step S2904 is the same as the accessory-driven execution process of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 41, overlapping description will be omitted.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57) that accepts a player's operation by detecting the presence or absence of an object (for example, a player's hand or arm) in the first range AR1. , The operation of the voice emission control device 90), the special effect execution means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes the special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and the operation of the first accessory 310. It is provided with a movable accessory control means (display control device 100) to be controlled. The special effect executing means is characterized in that the special effect is not executed while the movable accessory control means is operating the first accessory 310.

According to the above configuration, by not executing the special effect during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the movable accessory and prevent the player from performing unintended control. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(2) The movable accessory control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation when the movable accessory is operated (various flag storage areas). ), The special effect executing means refers to the operation state storage unit, and is characterized in that the special effect is not executed when the movable accessory is in operation.

According to the above configuration, the movable accessory control means stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in the operating state storage unit, and the special effect executing means is movable with reference to the operating state storage unit. Since it is determined whether or not the accessory is in operation, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to a movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration that only confirms the presence or absence of a flag. can. Further, since it is not necessary to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function of preventing the operation receiving means from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. ..

(3) When the operation of the movable accessory of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is completed, the movable accessory control means clears the information indicating that the movable accessory stored in the operation state storage unit is in operation. It is characterized by that.

When the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the movable accessory control means clears the information indicating that the movable accessory stored in the operation state storage unit is in operation, so that a special effect is produced after the operation of the movable accessory is completed. Can be executed. For this reason, the player can enjoy the special production and the taste is improved.

[Third Embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment does not perform a special effect by operating the touch sensor 57 while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating, so that the touch sensor 57 is erroneously operated by the movable accessory. The operation is prevented. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment does not accept the operation by the player while the movable accessory is operating, in other words, the touch sensor 57 by the movable accessory does not see the input of the touch sensor 57. Prevent malfunctions. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described, but the same components as those described in the first and second embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and duplicated description will be omitted.

<Regarding the audio emission side notice display execution process executed by the audio emission control device 90>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice emitting side notice display execution process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice emission side notice display execution process in order to execute the notice display determined in the effect pattern determination process. In this voice light emitting side notice display execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG. 55.

In step S3001, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3001 that the notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S3002.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3001 that the advance notice display is generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3002 whether or not the advance notice display is being generated.
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated by referring to the area indicating the advance notice display generating flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the notice display generation flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the notice display generation flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when the notice display is generated, and notifies the result of the notice display. At this time, the warning display generation flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display generation flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3002 that the notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3005.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3002 that the advance notice display is not occurring (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3003 whether or not the timing for generating the advance notice display, that is, the timing TM1 has been reached.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the timing counter TMB set in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less in step S3003, it determines that the timing TM1 has been reached and the value of the timing counter TMB. If it is determined that is not "0" or less, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.
In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing (1 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed after starting the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51, the timing TM1 is set. When it is determined that the timing has been reached and the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing has not elapsed, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.

If the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the advance notice set in step S3003 has not been reached (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side advance notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S3004. .. On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the notice display set in step S3003 has been reached (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notice display generation process in step S3004. Since the details of the notice display generation process in step S3004 have been described in the first embodiment, duplicated description will be omitted.

After executing the notice display generation process in step S3004, or when it is determined in step S3002 that the notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3005.
In step S3005, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not 5 sec, which is the standby time for the touch sensor, has elapsed after the warning display is generated.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3006.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3009.

First, in step S3005, a process (process after step S3006) when it is determined by the MPU 92 that the value set in the timer counter TB of various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less will be described.

In step S3006, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. In step S3006, when the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S3007.
On the other hand, in step S3006, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3007 whether or not the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3007 that the player is not holding his / her hand over the touch sensor 57 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S3008. ..
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3007 that the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57 (YES), the MPU 92 executes the advance notice result notification process in step S3008. In this notice result notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player of the result of the notice display generated in step S3004. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the first accessory 310, display control on the display screen G, and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player of the result of the notice display. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a notice result notification command to the display control device 100 to recognize that the notice result notification process has been executed.
The display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, but since this process has been described in the first embodiment, duplicated description will be omitted.

In step S3010, the MPU 92 clears the warning display generating flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Specifically, the MPU 92 clears the notice display occurrence flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. After that, the MPU 92 ends the sound emitting side notice display execution process.

Next, in step S3005, a process (processing after step S3009) when it is determined by the MPU 92 that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less will be described. do.
In step S3009, the MPU 92 executes the advance notice failure notification process. In this advance notice failure notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified. After that, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3008 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified. do. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a notice failure notification command to the display control device 100 to recognize that the notice failure notification process has been executed.
The display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the above description, when it is determined in step S3005 that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less in the MPU 92 (YES), the MPU 92 is determined in the step S3009. The notice failure notification process for notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified is being executed, but the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 in the MPU 92 is "0". If it is determined that the result is less than or equal to (YES), the MPU 92 may execute the process of step S3010 without notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in step S3006 of FIG. 55, it is determined whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven, and if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES). By ending the sound emitting side notice display execution process without executing the process after step S3007, in other words, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven, and the first step is When 1 accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the touch sensor 57 can be suitably detected by not detecting the touch sensor in step S3007. In other words, the touch sensor 57 can detect the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and prevent the player from performing unintended control.
Normally, since the operation position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. The accessory 310 is arranged. Therefore, even though the player is not operating the touch sensor 57, the first accessory 310 operates while the touch sensor 57 is being operated, so that the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first accessory 310 and the player However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is a risk of dissatisfaction due to the execution of unintended control, for example, an effect such as a notice effect or a one-shot announcement. Therefore, the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

<About the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process executed by the voice light emitting control device 90>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process of the third embodiment. In the first embodiment, during the period in which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted (operation acceptance period), the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is prohibited, so that the touch sensor 57 by the movable accessory is prohibited. Although malfunction is prevented, in the third embodiment, the movable accessory is not received from the operation (input) of the touch sensor 57 while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. Prevents malfunction of the touch sensor 57 due to the above. Therefore, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the notice display is being generated when the first accessory 310 is driven. Hereinafter, the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in order to drive the first accessory 310 determined by the accessory drive process. In this voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process, the MPU 92 periodically executes the process shown in FIG. 56 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S3101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first accessory 310 by referring to the area indicating the first accessory drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3101 that the first accessory 310 is not driven (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S3102.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3101 that the first accessory 310 is to be driven (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3102 whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. ..
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the accessory driving flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when driving the first accessory 310, and sets the first accessory. After driving the object 310, the accessory driving flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3102 that the first accessory is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S3103.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3102 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3103 whether or not it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94. When is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3103 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the step The voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process is terminated without executing the process after S3104.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3103 that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If this is the case, the accessory-driven execution process is executed in step S3104. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the first accessory drive pattern determination process in FIG. 38. The driving of the first accessory 310 is executed. Since the details of the accessory drive execution process in step S3104 have been described in the first embodiment, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

In step S3105, the bonus operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the bonus operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the drive of the first bonus 310 is completed.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment executes a special effect according to the operation reception means (touch sensor 57, voice emission control device 90) that receives the operation of the player and the reception result of the operation reception means. The special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) and the movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) that control the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310). The operation receiving means is characterized in that the operation by the player is not accepted while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to the above configuration, by not accepting the operation by the player during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent the malfunction due to the movable accessory and prevent the player from performing unintended control. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(2) The operation receiving means of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment includes a detector that detects the operation of the player, and is output from the detector while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory. It is characterized by ignoring the detection result.

According to the above configuration, the operation receiving means ignores the detection result output from the detector that detects the operation of the player during the operation of the movable accessory, so that the malfunction due to the movable accessory is prevented and the player's operation is prevented. It is possible to suppress unintended control. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(3) The movable accessory control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation when the movable accessory is operated (various flag storage areas). ), The operation receiving means refers to the operation state storage unit and ignores the detection result from the detector when the movable accessory is in operation.

Information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation is stored in the operation state storage unit, and the special effect executing means refers to the operation state storage unit to determine whether the movable accessory is in operation. With a simple configuration that only confirms the presence or absence of a flag, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to a movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function of preventing the operation receiving means from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. ..

[Varied Examples of First to Third Embodiments]
In the first to third embodiments, the notice display is not generated while the first accessory 310 is being driven. In other words, if the notice display occurs between the time when the first accessory drive flag is set and the time when the first accessory drive flag is cleared, this notice display is canceled. However, there is usually a time (time lag) of about 1 to several sec from the time when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 until the player performs the touch operation. When the player performs a touch operation, it is necessary for the player to recognize that the notice display is displayed on the display screen G and further extend his arm to the window panel 22 to perform the touch operation. Become. Therefore, after the notice display is displayed on the display screen G, it takes about 1 to several seconds for the player to perform the touch operation as described above.

Therefore, even if the first accessory 310 is being driven, if the drive of the first accessory 310 is completed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec), the first advance notice display is not canceled without canceling the first operation. It may be delayed until the driving of the accessory 310 is completed. Hereinafter, a modified example of the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

<Determining the production pattern>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process of the modified examples of the first to third embodiments.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process of FIG. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display, and when the notice display is won, whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven, in other words, is the first. 1 It is determined whether or not the accessory drive flag is ON, and if the first accessory 310 is being driven, a notice is displayed if the remaining drive time of the first accessory 310 is within a predetermined time. Control is performed to delay until the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed without canceling the generation of the first accessory 310.

In step S3201, the MPU 92 executes the notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display by using the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94.

The notice display lottery counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery (notice display lottery) as to whether or not to generate a notice display based on the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the buffer for the notice display lottery counter. Specifically, whether or not the MPU 92 generates the notice display by acquiring the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer and comparing this value with the notice display table. Execute the lottery. The notice display table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice display, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93. Since the notice display table has already been explained, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

In step S3202, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the notice display lottery has been won in step S3201. When the MPU 92 determines in step S3202 that the notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3203.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3202 that the notice display is generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3203 whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the first accessory drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

In step S3203, when the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), in step S3204, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining driving time of the first accessory 310. Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts the time driven by the first accessory 310 up to step S3203 from the drive time of the first accessory 310 in the drive pattern described with reference to FIG. 39 to drive the first accessory 310. Calculate the remaining time of. In this case, for example, the drive time of the first accessory 310 is recognized from the drive pattern read in step S2101 of FIG. 41, and the timer counter is operated when driving the first accessory 310 in step S2104, and step S3203 The drive time up to step S3203 is calculated based on the values of the timer counters up to. Then, the drive time of the first accessory 310 is calculated by subtracting the time driven by the first accessory 310 by step S3203 calculated based on the timer counter from the drive time of the first accessory 310 recognized from the drive pattern. Calculate the remaining time of.

In step 3205, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the remaining time calculated in step S3204 is the predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) or less.
If the remaining time is not less than or equal to the predetermined time in step 3205 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the process after step S3206 (that is, the notice display is canceled).
If the remaining time is less than or equal to the predetermined time in step 3205 (YES), in step S3206, the MPU 92 executes the notice display setting process. In this notice display setting process, whether or not to indicate to the player that the operation notice part is executed and the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, in other words, the notification that the notice display is executed. Judge whether or not to perform. When the MPU 92 determines that the notification is to be performed (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notification presence notice display setting process. In this notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of notification (with notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310. Further, the MPU 92 is set to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , The result of the notice display may be determined by setting so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed on the display screen G.

Further, in step S3206, the MPU 92 is the balance calculated in step S3204 at the timing at which the notice display is generated as the standby time (standby period) for the timing for generating the notice display on the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. Set the value corresponding to the time obtained by adding the time. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process. Therefore, when 1000 is set in the timing counter TMB, for example, the waiting time for the notification display occurrence timing is 2 sec. It becomes. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notice display is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

Further, when it is determined that the notification is not performed (NO), the MPU 92 executes the notification non-notification display setting process. In this notification non-notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of notification (no notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.
Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310. Further, the MPU 92 is set to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , The result of the notice display may be determined by setting so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed on the display screen G.

Further, in step S3206, the MPU 92 is the balance calculated in step S3204 at the timing at which the notice display is generated as the standby time (standby period) for the timing of the notification non-notification display occurrence timing in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. Set the value corresponding to the time obtained by adding the time. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process. Therefore, when 1500 is set in the timing counter TMB, for example, the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing is 3 sec. .. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notification no notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Returning to step S3203, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO) in step S3203, in step S3207, the MPU 92 executes a normal notice display setting process. When the MPU 92 determines that the notification is to be performed (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notification presence notice display setting process. In this notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of the notification (with notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310.
Further, the MPU 92 is set to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , The result of the notice display may be determined by setting so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed on the display screen G.

Further, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing at which the notice display is generated as the waiting time (waiting period) for the notification presence notice display generation timing in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so that the waiting time for the notification display occurrence timing is 1 sec. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notice display is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

Further, when it is determined that the notification is not performed (NO), the MPU 92 executes the notification non-notification display setting process. In this notification non-notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence / absence of notification (no notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing at which the notification display is generated.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information related to the result of success or failure. For example, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and when it is determined that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", it is the first. 1 The result of the notice display is determined by setting not to drive the accessory 310. Further, the MPU 92 may determine the result of the advance notice display by setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles based on the information related to the result of success or failure.

Further, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing at which the advance notice display is generated as the standby time (standby period) for the timing of occurrence of the notification no advance notice display in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so that the waiting time for the notification non-notification display occurrence timing is 1 sec. The waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the notification no notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In the modified example of the present embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", and the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". When it is determined that the first accessory 310 is not driven, the result of the advance notice display is set.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is increased, and the winning / failing result is "big hit winning". If it is determined that this is not the case, the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven may be lowered, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", it increases the probability of setting the display screen G to display the school of fish or bubbles, and determines that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". If this is the case, the probability of setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles may be lowered, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.

In step S3208, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the notice display winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the notice display is generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Then, when the result of the advance notice display is notified, the MPU 92 clears the advance notice winning flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

As described above, there is usually a time (time lag) of about 1 to several sec from the time when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 until the player performs the touch operation. Even if the first accessory 310 is being driven as in the modified example, if the drive of the first accessory 310 is completed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec), the occurrence of the notice display is not canceled. By delaying until the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed, the number of times the occurrence of the notice display is canceled can be reduced, and the notice display can be performed as many times as possible. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will be bored and to enhance the interest in the game, and it is possible to continue the game.

In the description of FIG. 57, when the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec), the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed without canceling the occurrence of the notice display. However, the method is not limited to the above method, and other methods may be used to delay until the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed without canceling the occurrence of the notice display.
For example, whether or not the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) based on the number of steps of the first accessory up / down motor driving the first accessory 310 up and down. May be determined. In this case, for example, the number of steps required for the first accessory 310 to return to the origin position is recognized from the difference between the number of steps at the origin position and the number of steps at the current position, and the recognized number of steps is used as the pulse velocity ( By dividing by (frequency), the time required for the first accessory 310 to return to the origin position can be calculated, and whether or not the drive of the first accessory 310 is completed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec). Can be determined.
The stepping motor performs a stop control (so-called slope) while gradually reducing the rotation speed when the motor is stopped, but since this time is very short, it is generally negligible in this determination.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment described above does not accept the operation by the player while the movable accessory is operating, thereby preventing the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. In the present embodiment, the touch by the first accessory 310 is touched by changing (moving) the detection range of the touch sensor 57 so that the touch sensor 57 does not detect when the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, operates. Prevents malfunction of the sensor 57. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described, but the same configurations as those described in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the touch sensor 57 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a touch sensor drive that rotationally drives the touch sensor 57 so as to be rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the game board 31. A portion 57a is provided.

FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board in a state where the first accessory 310 of the fourth embodiment is lowered to the maximum point position. As shown in FIG. 60, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the touch sensor 57 is driven by the touch sensor driving unit 57a, so that the central region of the symbol display device 51 is set as the detection range AR1. The detection state (see FIG. 60 (a)), the upper left detection state (see FIG. 60 (b)) in which the upper left area of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2, and the lower right area of the symbol display device 51 are detected. It is configured so that the lower right detection state (see FIG. 60 (c)) in the range AR3 can be changed stepwise.

Specifically, in the central detection state, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range set to widen from the lower left region to the upper right region of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. 60 (a). Has AR1. Then, in the central detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR1. Further, in the central detection state, when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, the touch sensor 57 is within the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57, so that the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310. In other words, in the central detection state, the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310 when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position.

Further, in the upper left detection state, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range AR2 set to widen from the lower left region of the symbol display device 51 toward the upper left region, as shown in FIG. 60 (b). is doing. Then, in the upper left detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR2. Further, in the upper left detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57, so that the touch sensor 57 cannot detect the first accessory 310. do not have. In other words, in the upper left detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be rotated counterclockwise by being driven by the touch sensor driving unit 57a, and can be changed from the center detection state to the upper left detection state.

Further, in the lower right detection state, the touch sensor 57 is set to widen from the lower left region to the lower right region of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. 60 (c). have. Then, in the lower right detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR3. Further, in the lower right detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57, so that the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310. There is no. In other words, in the lower right detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be rotated clockwise by being driven by the touch sensor driving unit 57a, and can be changed from the center detection state to the lower right detection state.

Since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical method, it is possible to detect the action of the player holding his / her hand within the detection ranges AR1 to AR3 through the window panel 22. However, even when the first accessory 310 enters the detection range of the touch sensor 57, it is detected, so countermeasures are required. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment changes the detection range of the touch sensor 57 by driving the touch sensor 57 by the touch sensor drive unit 57a when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. However, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310.

Here, in the notice display related to the touch sensor 57, the touch sensor 57 has an operation notice part that suggests the operation position of the touch sensor 57 to the player and a touch sensor 57 according to the operation position of the touch sensor 57 suggested in the operation notice part. It is composed of two parts, a notice result notification part that notifies the player of the result of the notice display when operated.
Here, in the operation notice part of the present embodiment, the notification notice display suggesting to the player to hold the hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and the hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 are held. It has a notification and no notice display that does not suggest to the player.

In the notification display that suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 executes the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation advance notice part, thereby displaying the symbol display device. The central detection state (see FIG. 61 (a)) in which the central region of 51 is the detection range AR1 and the upper left detection state (see FIG. 61 (b)) in which the upper left region of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2. , The lower right detection state (see FIG. 61 (c)) in which the lower right area of the symbol display device 51 is set as the detection range AR3 is gradually changed, and the operation position of the touch sensor 57 corresponding to each detection state is changed. It suggests to the player to hold his hand, and in the notice result notification part, the result of the notice display is notified to the player.

In the notification-less notice display that does not suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 executes the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part to display the symbol. The central detection state (see FIG. 61 (a)) in which the central region of 51 is the detection range AR1 and the upper left detection state (see FIG. 61 (b)) in which the upper left region of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2. , The lower right detection state (see FIG. 61 (c)) in which the lower right region of the symbol display device 51 is set as the detection range AR3 is changed stepwise. It should be noted that this notification non-notification display does not suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the operation position of the touch sensor 57 corresponding to each detection state, and the notification result notification part notifies the player of the result of the notification display. do.
The MPU 92 may execute a notice display having different contents depending on the operation position of the touch sensor 57.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an operation notice part of the notice display of each operation position. As described above, in the operation notice part, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a notification notice display suggesting to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and a display of the symbol display device 51. It has an unannounced notification display that does not suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the screen G. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram of a notification display that suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the notification display of the central operation position is displayed by rotating the touch sensor 57 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part. The image GB1A showing that the central area of the above is changed to the central detection state with the detection range AR1 and the hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the timer gauge showing the duration of the operation notice part. GB2A is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed on the lower side of this image GB1A.
Further, in the notification non-notification display of the central operation position, the touch sensor 57 is rotated by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part, and the central region of the symbol display device 51 is detected in the detection range AR1. However, the image suggesting to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed.

Then, the notice display of the central operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the notice result notification part, if the big hit is won or the big hit occurs. If the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice result notification part of the notice result notification part, if the result is normally out of order without winning the big hit, the notice display result is played by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the person.

As shown in FIG. 61B, the notice display of the upper left operation position is displayed by rotating the touch sensor 57 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part of the symbol display device 51. The image GB1B showing that the upper left area is changed to the upper left detection state with the detection range AR2 and the hand is held over the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the timer gauge GB2B showing the duration of the operation notice part. Is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed on the lower side of this image GB1B.
Further, in the notification non-notification display of the upper left operation position, the touch sensor 57 is rotated by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part, and the upper left region of the symbol display device 51 is detected in the detection range AR2. However, the image suggesting to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed.

Then, the notice display of the upper left operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the notice result notification part, if the big hit is won or the big hit occurs. If the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice result notification part of the upper left operation position, if the result is normally out of order without winning the big hit, the result of the notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the person.

In the operation warning part, the notification display of the lower right operation position is a symbol display device by rotating the touch sensor 57 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a, as shown in FIG. 61 (c). The image GB1C showing that the lower right area of 51 is changed to the lower right detection state in which the detection range AR3 is set, and the hand is held over the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the duration of the operation notice part. The timer gauge GB2C indicating the above is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed on the lower side of this image GB1C.
Further, in the notification non-notification display of the lower right operation position, the touch sensor 57 is rotated to detect the lower right area of the symbol display device 51 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part. The lower right detection state is changed to the range AR3, but the image suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the lower right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed.

Then, the notice display of the lower right operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57, and when the notice result notification part wins the jackpot occurrence or the jackpot occurs. If the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
Further, in the notice display of the lower right operation position, in the notice result notification part, if the result is normally out of order without winning the jackpot occurrence, the result of the notice display is displayed by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the player.

As in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the notice display notifies the player of the result of the notice display depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the notice result notification part. In the notice result notification part, the notice display result is notified to the player by displaying a school of fish and bubbles on the display screen G when the big hit occurrence is won, and the big hit occurrence is won. If not, the result of the notice display may be notified to the player by not displaying the school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G.

<Determining the production pattern>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process of FIG. In the process of determining the effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display, and sets the content and result of the notice display and the timing for generating the notice display.

In the present embodiment, among the notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process, only the notice display related to the touch sensor 57 will be described, and the description of the other notice displays will be omitted.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery for whether or not to generate another notice display. However, the touch sensor Only the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display related to 57 may be executed.

In step S3301, the MPU 92 executes the notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display by using the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94.

The notice display lottery counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (notice display lottery) as to whether or not to generate the notice display based on the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the buffer for the notice display lottery counter. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the notice display table to generate a notice display of each operation position. Execute a lottery to decide whether or not to let it. The notice display table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice display at each operation position, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

In step S3302, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the notice display lottery has been won in step S3301.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3302 that the advance notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3303.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3302 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notice display setting process of steps S3303 to S3308. In this notice display setting process, the touch sensor 57 is rotated to change the detection range depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving.
Specifically, the MPU 92 rotates the touch sensor 57 by reading out different table data depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving and executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a. As shown in FIG. 60, the central detection state in which the central area of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR1, the upper left detection state in which the upper left region of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2, and the symbol display device 51. The lower right region of the above is set to the detection range AR3, and the lower right detection state is set.

If it is determined in step S3302 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3303 whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving.
Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
In step S3303, when the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 refers to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.
On the other hand, in step S3303, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 refers to the second operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.

Here, the first and second operation position lottery table data are table data for defining the distribution destination of the operation position of the touch sensor 57.
In the table data for the first operation position lottery, since the first accessory 310 is in a movable state, the distribution is distributed to the symbol display device 51 so that the touch sensor 57 does not react to the first accessory 310. The upper left region of the above is the detection range AR2, and the lower right region of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR3.
Since the first accessory 310 is not movable in the second operation position lottery table data, the central detection state and the symbol display device whose distribution sets the central region of the symbol display device 51 as the detection range AR1. One of the upper left detection state in which the upper left region of 51 is the detection range AR2 and the lower right detection state in which the lower right region of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR3.

In step S3306, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery process. In this operation position lottery process, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the lottery of the operation position by the touch sensor 57 by comparing the first and second operation position lottery table data read in step S3304 or S3305 with the value of the operation position counter. do.

The operation position counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The operation position counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the operation position counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 94.
Then, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery (operation position lottery) by the touch sensor 57 based on the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the operation position counter stored in the buffer for the operation position counter, and compares this value with the table data for the first and second operation position lottery to touch the touch sensor 57. Execute a lottery for the operation position of. The first and second operation position lottery table data is a table that stores the value of the random number related to the operation position of the touch sensor 57, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

Further, in step S3306, the MPU 92 sets the operation position flag. The operation position flag is a flag for specifying the operation position of the notice display and the result of the notice display. Each operation position flag has three flags, a center operation position flag, an upper left operation position flag, and a lower right operation position flag. In other words, the MPU 92 can specify the operation position of the notice display and the result of the notice display by referring to three areas indicating each operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. can.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets only one of the operation position flags, but a plurality of flags may be set.

Then, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the central operation position flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the central operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. .. Further, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the upper left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the upper left operation position flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the upper left operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. .. Further, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the lower right operation position, the MPU 92 substitutes 1 for the area indicating the lower right operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby causing the lower right operation position flag. To set.

In step S3307, the MPU 92 executes a notice display setting process according to each operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3307 that the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the advance notice display of the central operation position in step S3307.

In the process of setting the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the "big hit is not won", the result of the notice display of the central operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3307 that the upper left operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the advance notice display of the upper left operation position in step S3307.

In the process of setting the notice display of the upper left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the upper left operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the upper left operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the "big hit is not won", the result of the advance notice display of the upper left operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3307 that the lower right operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the advance notice display of the lower right operation position in step S3307.

In the process of setting the notice display of the lower right operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the lower right operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the lower right operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the "big hit is not won", the result of the advance notice display of the lower right operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

In step S3308, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the notice display winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
Here, the advance notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the advance notice display of each operation position is generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display of each operation position by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the result of the advance notice display of each operation position, the advance notice winning flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result", and the winning / failing result is a "big hit". If it is determined that the result is not "winning" or "special loss result", the first accessory 310 is set not to be driven.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is increased, and the winning / failing result is increased. If it is determined that the result is not a "big hit win" or a "special miss result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is lowered, and a lottery is performed based on this probability to determine each operation position. The result of the notice display may be determined.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of each operation position based on the information related to the result of success or failure and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position based on other information such as the display duration. In short, the MPU 92 may set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery.

Specifically, in the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 has a reach display based on the information related to the display duration, and the player is told that the winning / losing lottery may have been a "big hit". If it is determined that the display duration is long enough to be expected (for example, when super reach occurs), the indicator lamp device 23 is set to emit light, and if it is determined that the display duration is not long, the indicator lamp device 23 is set to emit light. 23 may be set not to emit light.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in step S3203 of FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving, and if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES). , Refer to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.
Here, in the table data for the first operation position lottery, in order to prevent the touch sensor 57 from reacting by the first accessory 310, the upper left detection in which the distribution sets the upper left region of the symbol display device 51 as the detection range AR2. It is either a state or a lower right detection state in which the lower right area of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR3.
That is, while the first accessory 310 is being driven, the touch sensor 57 is configured not to be distributed to the central detection state in which the central region of the symbol display device 51 that reacts with the first accessory 310 is set as the detection range AR1. Therefore, the touch sensor 57 can be suitably detected. In other words, the touch sensor 57 can detect the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and prevent the player from performing unintended control.
Normally, since the operation position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. The accessory 310 is arranged. Therefore, even though the player is not operating, the first accessory 310 operates while the touch sensor 57 is being operated, so that the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first accessory 310 and the player However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is a risk of dissatisfaction due to the execution of unintended control, for example, an effect such as a notice effect or a one-shot announcement. Therefore, the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

<About the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process executed by the voice light emitting control device 90>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process of the fourth embodiment. In the first embodiment, during the period during which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted (operation acceptance period), the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is prohibited, so that the touch sensor 57 by the movable accessory is prohibited. Although malfunction is prevented, in the fourth embodiment, the touch by the movable accessory is touched by changing the detection range of the touch sensor 57 while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. Prevents malfunction of the sensor 57. Therefore, when driving the first accessory 310, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the notice display is being generated. Hereinafter, the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in order to drive the first accessory 310 determined by the accessory drive process. In this voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG. 63.

In step S3401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first accessory 310 by referring to the area indicating the first accessory drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3401 that the first accessory 310 is not driven (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S3402.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3401 to drive the first accessory 310 (YES), it determines in step S3402 whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven.
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the accessory driving flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when driving the first accessory 310, and sets the first accessory. After driving the object 310, the accessory driving flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3402 that the first accessory is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S3403.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3402 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3403 whether or not it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94. When is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3403 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the step The voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process is terminated without executing the processes after S3404.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3403 that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If this is the case, the accessory-driven execution process is executed in step S3404. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the first accessory drive pattern determination process in FIG. 38. The driving of the first accessory 310 is executed. Since the details of the accessory drive execution process in step S3404 have been described in the first embodiment, duplicate description will be omitted.

In step S3405, the bonus operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the bonus operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the drive of the first bonus 310 is completed.

[Modified example of the fourth embodiment]
In the above description, in order to change the detection range of the touch sensor 57, a touch sensor drive unit 57a for rotationally driving the touch sensor 57 so as to be rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the game board 31 is provided.
The pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment does not drive the touch sensor 57 in rotation, but drives the touch sensor 57 along a guide rail arranged along the upper side of the center frame 52. While the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating, the detection range of the touch sensor 57 that detects the operation of the player is changed (moved), and the touch sensor 57 malfunctions due to the first accessory 310. To prevent. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described, but the same components as those described in the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and duplicated description will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a front view of the game board in a state where the first accessory 310 of the fourth embodiment is lowered to the maximum point position. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment is driven by the touch sensor driving unit 57a (not shown) to detect the central region of the symbol display device 51 in the detection range AR1. The central detection state (see FIG. 64 (a)), the left side detection state (see FIG. 64 (b)) in which the left side area of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2, and the right side area of the symbol display device 51. It is configured so that the detection range AR3 on the right side (see FIG. 64 (c)) can be changed stepwise.

Specifically, in the central detection state, the touch sensor 57 is set to widen from the region of the upper center to the region of the lower center of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. 64 (a). It has a detection range AR1. Then, in the central detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR1. Further, in the central detection state, when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, the touch sensor 57 is within the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57, so that the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310. In other words, in the central detection state, the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310 when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position.

Further, in the left side detection state, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range AR2 set to widen from the left upper region to the left lower region of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. 64 (b). Have. Then, in the left side detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR2. Further, in the left side detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57, so that the touch sensor 57 cannot detect the first accessory 310. do not have. In other words, in the left side detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be changed from the central detection state to the left side detection state by being driven by the touch sensor drive unit 57a and changing the position to the upper left side of the center frame.

Further, in the right side detection state, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range AR3 set to widen from the upper right area to the lower right area of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. 64 (c). have. Then, in the right side detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR3. Further, in the right side detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57, so that the touch sensor 57 cannot detect the first accessory 310. do not have. In other words, in the right side detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be changed from the center detection state to the right side detection state by being driven by the touch sensor drive unit 57a and changing the position to the upper left side of the center frame.

Since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical method, it is possible to detect the action of the player holding his / her hand within the detection ranges AR1 to AR3 through the window panel 22. However, even when the first accessory 310 enters the detection range of the touch sensor 57, it is detected, so countermeasures are required. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment changes the detection range of the touch sensor 57 by driving the touch sensor 57 by the touch sensor drive unit 57a when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. However, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310.

Here, in the notice display related to the touch sensor 57, the touch sensor 57 has an operation notice part that suggests the operation position of the touch sensor 57 to the player and a touch sensor 57 according to the operation position of the touch sensor 57 suggested in the operation notice part. It is composed of two parts, a notice result notification part that notifies the player of the result of the notice display when operated.
Here, the operation notice part of the present embodiment includes a notification notice display suggesting to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and holding his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It has a notification and no notice display that does not suggest to the player.

In the notification display that suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 executes the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation advance notice part, thereby displaying the symbol display device. The central detection state (see FIG. 65 (a)) in which the central region of 51 is the detection range AR1 and the left side detection state (see FIG. 65 (b)) in which the region on the left side of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2. , The right side detection state (see FIG. 65 (c)) in which the area on the right side of the symbol display device 51 is set to the detection range AR3 is gradually changed, and the operation position of the touch sensor 57 corresponding to each detection state is moved. It suggests to the player to hold it over, and in the notice result notification part, the result of the notice display is notified to the player.

In the notification-less notice display that does not suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 executes the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part to display the symbol. A central detection state (see FIG. 65 (a)) in which the central region of 51 is set as the detection range AR1 and a left side detection state (see FIG. 65 (b)) in which the region on the left side of the symbol display device 51 is set as the detection range AR2. , The right side detection state (see FIG. 65 (c)) in which the area on the right side of the symbol display device 51 is set to the detection range AR3 is changed stepwise. It should be noted that this notification non-notification display does not suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the operation position of the touch sensor 57 corresponding to each detection state, and the notification result notification part notifies the player of the result of the notification display. do.
The MPU 92 may execute a notice display having different contents depending on the operation position of the touch sensor 57.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an operation notice part of the notice display of each operation position. In the operation notice part, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a notification display that suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and a hand on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It has a notification and no notice display that does not suggest to the player to hold it over. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of a notification display that suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51.

As shown in FIG. 65A, the notification display with notification of the central operation position displays the touch sensor 57 along the upper side of the center frame 52 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a as shown in FIG. 65 (a). The image GB1A showing that the central area of the symbol display device 51 is changed to the central detection state in which the detection range AR1 is set, and the hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the operation notice. A timer gauge GB2A indicating the duration of the part is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed below the image GB1A.
Further, in the notification non-notification display of the central operation position, the touch sensor 57 is moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part, and the symbol display device 51. The central region of the above is changed to the central detection state with the detection range AR1, but the image suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed.

Then, the notice display of the central operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the notice result notification part, if the big hit is won or the big hit occurs. If the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice result notification part of the notice result notification part, if the result is normally out of order without winning the big hit, the notice display result is played by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the person.

As shown in FIG. 65B, in the operation notice part, the notice display of the left operation position causes the touch sensor 57 to be along the upper side of the center frame 52 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a. The image GB1B showing that the area on the left side of the symbol display device 51 is changed to the left side detection state in which the detection range AR2 is set, and the hand is held over the left side position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and an operation notice. A timer gauge GB2B indicating the duration of the part is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed below the image GB1B.
Further, in the notification non-notification display of the left operation position, the touch sensor 57 is moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part, and the symbol display device 51. The area on the left side of is changed to the left side detection state in which the detection range AR2 is set, but the image suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the left side position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed.

Then, the notice display of the left operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the notice result notification part, if the big hit is won or the big hit occurs. If the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice result notification part of the left side operation position, if the result is normally out of order without winning the big hit, the result of the notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the person.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the operation notice part, the notification display of the right operation position causes the touch sensor 57 to be along the upper side of the center frame 52 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a. The area on the right side of the symbol display device 51 is changed to the right side detection state with the detection range AR3, and the image GB1C showing that the hand is held over the right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and the operation notice are displayed. A timer gauge GB2C indicating the duration of the part is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed below the image GB1C.
Further, in the notification non-notification display of the right operation position, the touch sensor 57 is moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part, and the symbol display device 51. The area on the right side of is changed to the right side detection state in which the detection range AR3 is set, but the image suggesting to the player to hold his / her hand over the right side position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed.

Then, the notice display of the right operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the notice result notification part, if the big hit is won or the big hit occurs. If the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice result notification part of the right side operation position, if the result is normally out of order without winning the big hit, the result of the notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the person.

As in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the notice display notifies the player of the result of the notice display depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the notice result notification part. In the notice result notification part, the notice display result is notified to the player by displaying a school of fish and bubbles on the display screen G when the big hit occurrence is won, and the big hit occurrence is won. If not, the result of the notice display may be notified to the player by not displaying the school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G.

<Determining the production pattern>
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process of FIG. In the process of determining the effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display, and sets the content and result of the notice display and the timing for generating the notice display.

In the present embodiment, among the notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process, only the notice display related to the touch sensor 57 will be described, and the description of the other notice displays will be omitted.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery for whether or not to generate another notice display. However, the touch sensor Only the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display related to 57 may be executed.

In step S3501, the MPU 92 executes the notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display by using the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94.

The notice display lottery counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (notice display lottery) as to whether or not to generate the notice display based on the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the buffer for the notice display lottery counter. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the notice display table to generate a notice display of each operation position. Execute a lottery to decide whether or not to let it. The notice display table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice display at each operation position, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

In step S3502, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the notice display lottery has been won in step S3501.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3502 that the advance notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3503.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3502 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notice display setting process of steps S3503 to S3508. In this notice display setting process, the touch sensor 57 is moved to change the detection range depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving.
Specifically, the MPU 92 moves the touch sensor 57 by reading out different table data and executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving. As shown in FIG. 64, the central detection state in which the central area of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR1, the left side detection state in which the area on the left side of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2, and the symbol display device 51. The area on the right side of is set to the detection range AR3, and the detection state on the right side is set to one of the states.

If it is determined in step S3502 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3503 whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving.
Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
In step S3503, when the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), in step S3504, the MPU 92 refers to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.
On the other hand, in step S3503, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), in step S3505, the MPU 92 uses the second operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93. refer.

Here, the first and second operation position lottery table data are table data for defining the distribution destination of the operation position of the touch sensor 57.
In the table data for the first operation position lottery, since the first accessory 310 is in a movable state, the distribution is distributed to the symbol display device 51 so that the touch sensor 57 does not react to the first accessory 310. The left area of the symbol display device 51 is set to the detection range AR2, and the area on the right side of the symbol display device 51 is set to the detection range AR3.
Since the first accessory 310 is not movable in the second operation position lottery table data, the central detection state and the symbol display device whose distribution sets the central region of the symbol display device 51 as the detection range AR1. It is either a left side detection state in which the area on the left side of 51 is the detection range AR2 or a right side detection state in which the area on the right side of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR3.

In step S3506, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery process. In this operation position lottery process, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the lottery of the operation position by the touch sensor 57 by comparing the first and second operation position lottery table data read in step S3504 or S3505 with the value of the operation position counter. do.

The operation position counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the operation position counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 94.
Then, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery (operation position lottery) by the touch sensor 57 based on the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the operation position counter stored in the buffer for the operation position counter, and compares this value with the table data for the first and second operation position lottery to touch the touch sensor 57. Execute a lottery for the operation position of. The first and second operation position lottery table data is a table that stores the value of the random number related to the operation position of the touch sensor 57, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

Further, in step S3506, the MPU 92 sets the operation position flag. The operation position flag is a flag for specifying the operation position of the notice display and the result of the notice display. Each operation position flag has three flags, a center operation position flag, a left operation position flag, and a right operation position flag. In other words, the MPU 92 can specify the operation position of the notice display and the result of the notice display by referring to three areas indicating each operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. can.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets only one of the operation position flags, but a plurality of flags may be set.

Then, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the central operation position flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the central operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. .. Further, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the left operation position flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the left operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. .. Further, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the right operation position, the MPU 92 sets the right operation position flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the right operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. ..

In step S3507, the MPU 92 executes a notice display setting process according to each operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3507 that the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the advance notice display of the central operation position in step S3507.

In the process of setting the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the "big hit is not won", the result of the notice display of the central operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3507 that the left operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the notice display of the left operation position in step S3507.

In the process of setting the notice display of the left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the left operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the left operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the "big hit is not won", the result of the notice display of the left operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3507 that the right operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the notice display of the right operation position in step S3507.

In the process of setting the notice display of the right operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the right operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the right operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the game is not a big hit, the result of the notice display of the right operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

In step S3508, the MPU 92 sets the advance notice winning flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
Here, the advance notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the advance notice display of each operation position is generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display of each operation position by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the result of the advance notice display of each operation position, the advance notice winning flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result", and the winning / failing result is a "big hit". If it is determined that the result is not "winning" or "special loss result", the first accessory 310 is set not to be driven.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is increased, and the winning / failing result is increased. If it is determined that the result is not a "big hit win" or a "special miss result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is lowered, and a lottery is performed based on this probability to determine each operation position. The result of the notice display may be determined.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of each operation position based on the information related to the result of success or failure and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position based on other information such as the display duration. In short, the MPU 92 may set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery.

Specifically, in the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 has a reach display based on the information related to the display duration, and the player is told that the winning / losing lottery may have been a "big hit". If it is determined that the display duration is long enough to be expected (for example, when super reach occurs), the indicator lamp device 23 is set to emit light, and if it is determined that the display duration is not long, the indicator lamp device 23 is set to emit light. 23 may be set not to emit light.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the touch sensor 57 is moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 to change the detection range while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. This prevents the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to a movable accessory. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, when driving the first accessory 310, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the advance notice display is being generated. Regarding the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process. Is the same as the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process according to the fourth embodiment, and therefore the duplicate description will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in step S3503 of FIG. 66, it is determined whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving, and if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES). , Refer to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.
Here, in the table data for the first operation position lottery, in order to prevent the touch sensor 57 from reacting by the first accessory 310, the left side detection in which the distribution thereof sets the area on the left side of the symbol display device 51 as the detection range AR2. It is either a state or a right side detection state in which the area on the right side of the symbol display device 51 is set as the detection range AR3.
That is, while the first accessory 310 is being driven, the touch sensor 57 is configured so as not to be distributed to the central detection state in which the central region of the symbol display device 51 that reacts with the first accessory 310 is set as the detection range AR1. Therefore, the touch sensor 57 can be suitably detected. In other words, the touch sensor 57 can detect the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and prevent the player from performing unintended control.
Normally, since the operation position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. The accessory 310 is arranged. Therefore, even though the player does not operate the touch sensor 57, the first accessory 310 operates while the touch sensor 57 is being operated, so that the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first accessory 310 and the player However, the player's satisfaction can be improved because he / she can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied by performing an unintended control, for example, a notice effect or an effect such as a one-shot announcement.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment executes a special effect according to the operation reception means (touch sensor 57, voice emission control device 90) that receives the operation of the player and the reception result of the operation reception means. The special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) and the movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) that control the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310). The operation reception means changes the detection range of the player's operation so that the movable accessory is not within the operation of the operation reception means while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory. It is characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, while the movable accessory is operating, the detection range of the touch sensor is changed to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(2) The operation receiving means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment detects the first detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player does not overlap with the operation range of the movable accessory, and the operation of the player. The detection range has a second detection range that overlaps with the movement range of the movable accessory, and while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory, the operation of the player within the second detection range is detected. It is characterized by not doing.

According to the above configuration, while the movable accessory is being operated, the operation of the player within the second detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player overlaps with the operation range of the movable accessory is not detected. Therefore, the malfunction of the touch sensor due to the movable accessory is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is characterized by including a detection range switching means for switching the first and second detection ranges by changing the position or direction of the operation receiving means.

According to the above configuration, the detection range is switched by changing the position or orientation of the operation reception means, so that the detection range can be switched by one operation reception means.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the center frame 52 includes a touch sensor 57, and the touch sensor 57 is driven by the touch sensor drive unit 57a to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise to operate the player. The detection range of the touch sensor 57 for detecting the above is changed (moved) to prevent the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to the first accessory 310 while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. ..
Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the touch sensor 57 is driven by the touch sensor drive unit 57a and moves along the guide rail arranged along the upper side of the center frame 52, thereby playing a game. The detection range of the touch sensor 57 that detects the operation of a person is changed (moved) to prevent the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to the first accessory 310 while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. is doing.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of touch sensors 57A to 57D are provided, and the touch sensors 57A to 57D for detecting the player's touch operation according to the presence or absence of the operation of the first accessory 310 are switched. While the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating, the touch sensor 57 is prevented from malfunctioning due to the first accessory 310.
Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings, but the same configurations as those described in the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and duplicated description will be omitted.

FIG. 67 is a front view of the game board of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device according to the fifth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the center frame 52 includes four touch sensors 57A to 57D, and each touch sensor 57A to 57D does not have a touch sensor drive unit and is fixed so as not to operate. ing.
Specifically, the touch sensor 57A is fixed to the lower left region of the symbol display device 51. Further, the touch sensor 57B is fixed in the central region on the right side of the symbol display device 51. Further, the touch sensor 57C is fixed to the lower left region of the symbol display device 51. Further, the touch sensor 57D is fixed in the lower right region of the symbol display device 51.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor of the present embodiment and the first accessory, (a) shows the case where the first accessory is at the origin position, and (b) is the first. 1 The case where the accessory is at the maximum point position is shown.
As shown in FIG. 69, the touch sensor 57A has a detection range AR1 set to widen from the lower left region of the symbol display device 51 toward the upper right region. Then, the touch sensor 57A can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR1.
Further, the touch sensor 57B has a detection range AR2 set to widen from the right central region of the symbol display device 51 toward the left central region. Then, the touch sensor 57B can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR2.

Further, the touch sensors 57A and 57B have a detection range AR12 set in the central region of the symbol display device 51. Specifically, the detection range AR12 is a superposition site of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2. In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR12, each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57A and 57B employ an optical method, the action of the player holding his / her hand within the detection ranges AR1 to AR2 can be detected through the window panel 22.

In the present embodiment, when the touch sensors 57A and 57B operate as a set of detection sensors and both the touch sensors 57A and 57B detect the player's operation, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand. .. In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR12 and each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding his / her hand, and the player has an operation other than the detection range AR12. If the player holds his hand over the area and only one of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this, or if both the touch sensors 57A and 57B do not detect this, the player has not held his hand. judge.
By determining that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both the touch sensors 57A and 57B have detected the operation of the player in this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like.

Further, the touch sensor 57C has a detection range AR3 set to widen from the lower left region to the lower right region of the symbol display device 51. Then, the touch sensor 57C can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR3.
Further, the touch sensor 57D has a detection range AR4 set to widen from the lower right region to the lower left region of the symbol display device 51. Then, the touch sensor 57D can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR4.

Further, the touch sensors 57C and 57D have a detection range AR34 set in a region on the lower center side of the symbol display device 51. Specifically, this detection range AR34 is a superposition site of the detection ranges AR3 and AR4. In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR34, each of the touch sensors 57C and 57D can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57C and 57D employ an optical method, the action of the player holding his / her hand within the detection ranges AR3 to AR4 can be detected through the window panel 22.

In the present embodiment, when the touch sensors 57C and 57D operate as a set of detection sensors and both the touch sensors 57C and 57D detect the player's operation, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand. .. In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR34 and each of the touch sensors 57C and 57D detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding his / her hand, and the player has an operation other than the detection range AR34. If the player holds his hand over the area and only one of the touch sensors 57C and 57D detects this, or if both the touch sensors 57C and 57D do not detect this, the player has not held his hand. judge.
By determining that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both the touch sensors 57C and 57D have detected the operation of the player in this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like.

Here, in the case of false detection of the touch sensors 57A to 57D, when the player touches the peripheral portion of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 with a momentum even though the player did not intend to operate it, or the window. This includes the case where the touch sensors 57A to 57D erroneously detect due to the reflection of light from the outside of the panel 22. In particular, in recent years, there have been models having an operation panel and an accessory (so-called gimmick) provided extending from the side surface of the housing of the pachinko machine 10 toward the player side in order to improve the interest of the player. It is conceivable that the touch sensors 57A to 57D will make an erroneous detection when operating the pal or the accessory, but both the touch sensors 57A and 57B operate the player by using the touch sensors 57A and 57B as a set of sensors. If it is detected, or if both the touch sensors 57C and 57D detect the player's operation with the touch sensors 57C and 57D as a set of sensors, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand. It is possible to prevent such false detection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR12 which is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B will be described.
FIG. 69A is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the origin position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR4 of the touch sensors 57A to 57D. In the example shown in FIG. 69A, the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B are not overlapped in a plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69A, the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D are not overlapped in a plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57C and 57D.

FIG. 69B is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the maximum point position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR4 of the touch sensors 57A to 57D. In the example shown in FIG. 69B, the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B are in a state of overlapping in a plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is the position where the first accessory 310 is detected by the detection sensor including the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69B, the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D are not overlapped in a plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57C and 57D.

In the following description, the state in which the detection range is the overlapping portion (detection range AR12) between the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B is referred to as a central detection state, and the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57C. The state in which the detection range is the overlapped portion (detection range AR34) with the detection range AR4 of the touch sensor 57D is referred to as the lower center detection state.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical method, the action of the player holding his / her hand over the detection range AR 12 can be detected through the window panel 22. Therefore, in the central detection state where the detection range is the overlapping portion (detection range AR12) between the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B, the first accessory 310 is detected. You will need it. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, during the operation of the first accessory 310, the operation detection of the player is not performed by the touch sensors 57A and 57B whose detection range overlaps with the operation range of the first accessory 310, and the detection is performed. The player's operation is detected by the touch sensors 57C and 57D whose range does not overlap with the operating range of the first accessory 310.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the plurality of touch sensors 57A to 57D are provided, and the central detection state and the central lower detection state are switched according to the presence or absence of the operation of the first accessory 310, and the first accessory 310 is used. It prevents the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning.

In the present embodiment, the touch sensors 57A to 57D have two operation positions having different detection ranges for detecting the player's operation (a central detection state having the center of the symbol display device 51 as the operation position and the symbol display device 51). The lower center detection state) with the lower center as the operation position) is provided, but three or more operation positions may be provided. That is, the operating means may include a plurality of operating positions having different detection ranges for detecting the player's operation.
Further, in the present embodiment, the operation position of the touch operation by the player is the overlapping portion (detection range AR12) between the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B, and the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57C. And the detection range AR4 of the touch sensor 57D are overlapped with each other (detection range AR34). However, if the performance of the touch sensor is good and the false detection is at a level where there is no problem, the detection range other than the superimposed portion may be set as the detection range of the touch operation.

In the present embodiment, the notice display related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D is an operation notice part that suggests the operation position of the touch sensors 57A to 57D to the player, and the touch sensor 57A according to the operation position of the touch sensors 57A to 57D. It is composed of two parts, a notice result notification part that notifies the player of the result of the notice display when ~ 57D is operated.
The operation notice part of the present embodiment is a notification display that suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and a player that holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It has a noticeless display that does not suggest to.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the central detection state (see FIG. 70A) in which the central region of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR12 and the detection range in the region below the center of the symbol display device 51. It has a lower center detection state (see FIG. 70 (b)) as AR34.
In the notification display, the MPU 92 suggests to the player that he / she holds his / her hand over the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D corresponding to each detection state, and notifies the player of the result of the notification display in the notification result notification part. do.
Further, in the notification no notice display, the player is not suggested to hold his / her hand over the operation position corresponding to each detection state, and the result of the notice display is notified to the player in the notice result notification part.
The MPU 92 may execute a notice display having different contents depending on the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D.

As described above, in the operation notice part, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a notification notice display suggesting to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and a display of the symbol display device 51. It has an unannounced notification display that does not suggest to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the screen G. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of a notification display that suggests to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an operation notice part of the notice display of each operation position. As shown in FIG. 70A, the notification display of the central operation position includes the image GB1A indicating that the hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and the operation notice part. A timer gauge GB2A indicating the duration of the image GB2A is displayed, and the characters "touch!" Are displayed below the image GB1A.
Further, the notification non-notification display of the central operation position does not display an image suggesting to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the operation notification part.

Then, the notice display of the central operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the overlapping detection range of the touch sensors 57A and 57B, and the big hit occurrence is won in the notice result notification part. If there is a special hit, or if the result is a special loss without winning the jackpot, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice result notification part of the notice result notification part, if the result is normally out of order without winning the big hit, the notice display result is played by not driving the first accessory 310. Notify the person.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), the notification display with notification of the lower center operation position is the image GB1B indicating that the hand is held over the lower center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the operation notice part. , The timer gauge GB2B indicating the duration of the operation notice part is displayed, and the character "touch!" Is displayed on the lower side of this image GB1B.
Further, the notification non-notification display of the lower center operation position does not display an image suggesting to the player that the player holds his / her hand over the lower center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the operation notice part. ..

Then, the notice display of the lower center operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his / her hand over the overlapping detection range of the touch sensors 57C and 57D, and the big hit is won in the notice result notification part. If the result is a special loss without winning the jackpot, the player is notified of the result of the notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, the notice display of the lower center operation position is the result of the notice display by not driving the first accessory 310 when the result is normally out of order without winning the jackpot occurrence in the notice result notification part. Is notified to the player.

As in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the notice display notifies the player of the result of the notice display depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the notice result notification part. In the notice result notification part, the notice display result is notified to the player by displaying a school of fish and bubbles on the display screen G when the big hit occurrence is won, and the big hit occurrence is won. If not, the result of the notice display may be notified to the player by not displaying the school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G.

<Determining the production pattern>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process of FIG. In the process of determining the effect pattern, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display, and sets the content and result of the notice display and the timing for generating the notice display.

In the present embodiment, among the notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process, only the notice displays related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D will be described, and the description of the other notice displays will be omitted.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D and a lottery for whether or not to generate another notice display. Only the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D may be executed.

In step S3601, the MPU 92 executes the notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.
The MPU 92 executes a lottery for whether or not to generate a notice display by using the value of the notice display lottery counter. The notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94.

The notice display lottery counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (notice display lottery) as to whether or not to generate the notice display based on the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the buffer for the notice display lottery counter. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the notice display lottery counter stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the notice display table to generate a notice display of each operation position. Execute a lottery to decide whether or not to let it. The notice display table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice display at each operation position, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

In step S3602, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the notice display lottery has been won in step S3601.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3602 that the notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3603.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3602 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notice display setting process of steps S3603 to S3608. In this notice display setting process, the detection range is set based on which of the touch sensors 57A to 57D is used to detect the touch operation, depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving. change.
Specifically, the MPU 92 reads different table data depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is operating, and when the first accessory 310 is not operating, the touch sensors 57C to 57D are used. The touch operation is detected, and when the first accessory 310 is in operation, the touch operation is detected only by the touch sensors 57C and 57D. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the MPU 92 sets the central region of the symbol display device 51 as the detection range (detection range AR12) depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is in operation. The central detection state is switched between the central detection state in which the area below the center of the symbol display device 51 is set as the detection range (detection range AR34) and the lower center detection state is set to either state.

If it is determined in step S3602 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3603 whether or not the first accessory 310 is moving.
Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
In step S3603, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 refers to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.
On the other hand, in step S3603, when the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 refers to the second operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93. do.

Here, the first and second operation position lottery table data are table data for defining the distribution destination of the operation position of the touch sensor 57.
The table data for the first operation position lottery is a state in which the first accessory 310 is not movable, and it is not necessary to prevent the touch sensors 57A to 57D from reacting with the first accessory 310, and the distribution thereof is a symbol. It is either a central detection state in which the central area of the display device 51 is the detection range AR12, or a central lower detection state in which the area below the center of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR34.
The second operation position lottery table data is in a state where the first accessory 310 is movable, and the distribution is set in the symbol display device so that the touch sensors 57A and 57B do not react to the first accessory 310. Only the lower center detection state has the detection range AR34 in the lower center region of 51.

In step S3606, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery process. In this operation position lottery process, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 draws the operation position by the touch sensors 57A to 57D by comparing the first and second operation position lottery table data read in step S3604 or S3605 with the value of the operation position counter. To execute.

The operation position counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the operation position counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 94.
Then, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery (operation position lottery) by the touch sensors 57A to 57D based on the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 obtains the value of the operation position counter stored in the buffer for the operation position counter, and compares this value with the table data for the first operation position lottery to obtain the touch sensors 57A to 57D. Execute a lottery for operating positions. The first and second operation position lottery table data is a table that stores the values of random numbers related to the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D, and is stored in the notice table storage area of the ROM 93.

Further, in step S3606, the MPU 92 sets the operation position flag. The operation position flag is a flag for specifying the operation position of the notice display and the result of the notice display. Each operation position flag has two flags, a center operation position flag and a center lower operation position flag. In other words, the MPU 92 can specify the operation position of the notice display and the result of the notice display by referring to two areas indicating each operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. can.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets only one of the operation position flags, but a plurality of flags may be set.

Then, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the central operation position flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the central operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. .. Further, when the MPU 92 generates a notice display of the lower center operation position, the MPU 92 substitutes 1 for the area indicating the lower center operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby causing the lower center side. Set the operation position flag.

In step S3607, the MPU 92 executes a notice display setting process according to each operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3607 that the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the advance notice display of the central operation position in step S3607.

In the process of setting the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the "big hit is not won", the result of the notice display of the central operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3607 that the center lower operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the advance notice display of the center lower operation position in step S3607. ..

In the process of setting the notice display of the lower center operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the lower center operation position so as to be related to the result of the winning / failing lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration and the information related to the pass / fail result based on the contents of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the lower center operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93.

Specifically, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" based on the information related to the winning / failing result, and the winning / failing result is ". If it is determined that the "big hit is not won", the result of the advance notice display of the lower center operation position is set by setting not to drive the first accessory 310.

In step S3608, the MPU 92 sets the advance notice winning flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
Here, the advance notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the advance notice display of each operation position is generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display of each operation position by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the result of the advance notice display of each operation position, the advance notice winning flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result", and the winning / failing result is a "big hit". If it is determined that the result is not "winning" or "special loss result", the first accessory 310 is set not to be driven.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is increased, and the winning / failing result is increased. If it is determined that the result is not a "big hit win" or a "special miss result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is lowered, and a lottery is performed based on this probability to determine each operation position. The result of the notice display may be determined.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of each operation position based on the information related to the result of success or failure and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position based on other information such as the display duration. In short, the MPU 92 may set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position so as to have a relation with the result of the winning / failing lottery.

Specifically, in the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 has a reach display based on the information related to the display duration, and the player is told that the winning / losing lottery may have been a "big hit". If it is determined that the display duration is long enough to be expected (for example, when super reach occurs), the indicator lamp device 23 is set to emit light, and if it is determined that the display duration is not long, the indicator lamp device 23 is set to emit light. 23 may be set not to emit light.

<Regarding the audio emission side notice display execution process executed by the audio emission control device 90>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice emitting side notice display execution process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice emission side notice display execution process in order to execute the notice display determined in the effect pattern determination process. In this voice light emitting side notice display execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG. 72.

In step S3701, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice display winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3701 that the notice display is not generated (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice emitting side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S3702.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3701 that the advance notice display is generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3702 whether or not the advance notice display is being generated.
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated by referring to the area indicating the advance notice display generating flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the notice display generation flag by substituting 1 for the area indicating the notice display generation flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when the notice display is generated, and notifies the result of the notice display. At this time, the warning display generation flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display generation flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S3702 that the notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3705.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3702 that the advance notice display is not occurring (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3703 whether or not the timing for generating the advance notice display, that is, the timing TM1 has been reached.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the timing counter TMB set in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is “0” or less in step S3703 of FIG. 72, it determines that the timing TM1 has been reached and the timing counter. When it is determined that the TMB value is not "0" or less, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.
In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing (1 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed after starting the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51, the timing TM1 is set. When it is determined that the timing has been reached and the waiting time for the advance notice display occurrence timing has not elapsed, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.

When the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the notice display set in step S3703 of FIG. 72 has not been reached (NO), the voice emitting side notice display execution process is performed without executing the processes after step S3704. To finish. On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the notice display set in step S3703 of FIG. 72 has been reached (YES), the MPU 92 executes the notice display generation process in step S3704. Since the details of the notice display generation process in step S3704 have been described in the first embodiment, duplicated description will be omitted.

After executing the notice display generation process in step S3704, or when it is determined in step S3702 that the notice display is being generated (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3705.
In step S3705, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not 5 sec, which is the standby time for the touch sensor, has elapsed after the warning display is generated.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S3706 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3708.

First, in step S3705, a process (process after step S3706) when it is determined by the MPU 92 that the value set in the timer counter TB of various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less will be described.

In step S3706, the MPU 92 executes the touch sensor detection process depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. The details of the touch sensor detection process in step S3707 will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

In step S3707, the MPU 92 executes the advance notice result notification process. In this notice result notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player of the result of the notice display generated in step S3704. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the first accessory 310, display control on the display screen G, and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player of the result of the notice display. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a notice result notification command to the display control device 100 to recognize that the notice result notification process has been executed.
The display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, but since this process has been described in the first embodiment, duplicated description will be omitted.

In step S3709, the MPU 92 clears the warning display generating flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. Specifically, the MPU 92 clears the notice display occurrence flag by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. After that, the MPU 92 ends the sound emitting side notice display execution process.

Next, in step S3705, a process (processing after step S3708) when it is determined by the MPU 92 that the value set in the timer counter TB of various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less will be described. do.
In step S3708, the MPU 92 executes the advance notice failure notification process. In this advance notice failure notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified. After that, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3709 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified. do. Further, the MPU 92 transmits a notice failure notification command to the display control device 100 to recognize that the notice failure notification process has been executed.
The display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In the above description, when it is determined in step S3705 that the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is "0" or less in the MPU 92 (YES), the MPU 92 is determined in the step S3708. The notice failure notification process for notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified is being executed, but the value set in the timer counter TB of the various counter areas of the RAM 94 in the MPU 92 is "0". If it is determined that the result is less than or equal to (YES), the MPU 92 may execute the process of step S3709 without notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified.

<About the touch sensor detection process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the touch sensor detection process of the fifth embodiment.
Here, the touch sensor detection process executed in step S3706 of FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

In step S3801, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. In step S3801, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), in step S3802, the MPU 92 detects the touch operation by the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the touch sensors 57C and 57D. In other words, it is determined whether or not the touch operation is performed in at least one of the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D.
Further, in step S3801 when the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), in step S3803, the MPU 92 only detects the touch operation by the touch sensors 57C and 57D. In other words, it is determined whether or not the touch operation is performed in the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D without detecting whether or not the touch operation is performed in the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B. ..

When a touch operation is performed in at least one of the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D in step S3802 (YES), or the touch sensors 57C and 57D in step S3803. When the touch operation is performed in the superimposed detection range AR34 (YES), the MPU 92 performs the process of step S3707 in FIG. 72.
Further, when the touch operation is not performed in at least one of the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D in step S3802 (NO), or the touch sensor in step S3803. When the touch operation is not performed in the overlapping detection range AR34 of 57C and 57D (NO), the MPU 92 performs the process of step S3709 of FIG. 72.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the touch sensor detection process of step S3706 of FIG. 72, it is determined whether or not the first accessory 310 is in operation, and the first accessory 310 is in operation. When the determination is made (YES), the player's operation is not detected by the touch sensors 57A and 57B whose detection range overlaps with the operating range of the first accessory 310, and the detection range overlaps with the operating range of the first accessory 310. The player's operation is detected by the touch sensors 57C and 57D. In other words, the detection range of the player's touch operation is switched to the detection range AR34 that does not overlap with the operation range of the first accessory 310. This makes it possible to suitably detect the player's touch operation by the touch sensors 57A to 57D. In other words, the touch sensors 57A to 57D can detect the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and prevent the player from performing unintended control.
Normally, since the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D differ depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensors 57A to 57D is wide. The first accessory 310 is arranged. Therefore, even though the player is not operating, the first accessory 310 operates while the touch sensors 57A to 57D are being operated, so that the touch sensors 57A to 57D react to the first accessory 310. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may feel dissatisfied with the execution of unintended control, for example, a notice effect or an effect such as a one-shot notification. Therefore, the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

<About the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process executed by the voice light emitting control device 90>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process of the fifth embodiment. In the first embodiment, during the period in which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted (operation acceptance period), the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is prohibited, so that the touch sensor 57 by the movable accessory is prohibited. Although malfunction is prevented, in the fifth embodiment, the set of the touch sensors 57A to 57D for detecting the touch operation of the player is switched while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. This prevents the touch sensors 57A to 57D from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the notice display is being generated when the first accessory 310 is driven. Hereinafter, the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process in order to drive the first accessory 310 determined by the accessory drive process. In this voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG. 74.

In step S3901, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first accessory 310 by referring to the area indicating the first accessory drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3901 that the first accessory 310 is not driven (NO), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S3902.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3901 that the first accessory 310 is driven (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3902 whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. ..
The MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. The MPU 92 sets the accessory driving flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 when driving the first accessory 310, and sets the first accessory. After driving the object 310, the accessory driving flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3902 that the first accessory is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process without executing the processes after step S3903.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3902 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3903 whether or not it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310. .. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94. When is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3903 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the step The voice light emitting side accessory drive execution process is terminated without executing the process after S3904.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3903 that it is the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If this is the case, the accessory-driven execution process is executed in step S3904. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the first accessory drive pattern determination process in FIG. 38. The driving of the first accessory 310 is executed. Since the details of the accessory drive execution process in step S3904 have been described in the first embodiment, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

In step S3905, the bonus operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the bonus operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the drive of the first bonus 310 is completed.

[Variation example of the fifth embodiment]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a detection range of the touch sensor of the modified example of the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the touch sensors 57C and 57D are set as a set to detect the touch operation from the viewpoint of preventing noise. However, in this method, there are four touch sensors. Although it is necessary, as shown in FIG. 75, it is also possible to provide a form including three touch sensors 57A to 57C. Hereinafter, a modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75, but the same components as those described in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and duplicated description will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 of the modification of the present embodiment is a touch sensor 57A having a detection range AR1 set to widen from the lower left region of the symbol display device 51 toward the upper right region, and the upper left of the symbol display device 51. The touch sensor 57B having a detection range AR2 set to widen from the side area toward the upper right side area, widen from the lower left area to the lower right area of the symbol display device 51. A touch sensor 57C having a detection range AR3 set in may be provided.

The touch sensor 57A can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR1.
The touch sensor 57B can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR2.
The touch sensor 57C can detect when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR3.

Further, the touch sensors 57A and 57B have a detection range AR21 set in the area on the upper center of the symbol display device 51. Specifically, the detection range AR21 is a superposition site of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2. In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR21, each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57A and 57B employ an optical method, the action of the player holding his / her hand within the detection ranges AR1 and AR2 can be detected through the window panel 22.

In the modification of the present embodiment, when the touch sensors 57A and 57B operate as a set of detection sensors and both the touch sensors 57A and 57B detect the player's operation, the player holds his hand over the operation. Judged as In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR21 and each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding his / her hand, and the player has an operation other than the detection range AR21. If the player holds his hand over the area and only one of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this, or if both the touch sensors 57A and 57B do not detect this, the player has not held his hand. judge.
As described above, by determining that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both the touch sensors 57A and 57B detect the operation of the player, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like.

Further, the touch sensors 57A and 57C have a detection range AR13 set in the lower left region of the symbol display device 51. Specifically, the detection range AR13 is a superposition site of the detection ranges AR1 and AR3. In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR13, each of the touch sensors 57A and 57C can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57A and 57C employ an optical method, the action of the player holding his / her hand within the detection ranges AR1 and AR3 can be detected through the window panel 22.

In the modification of the present embodiment, when the touch sensors 57A and 57C operate as a set of detection sensors and both the touch sensors 57A and 57C detect the player's operation, the player holds his hand over the operation. Judged as In other words, when the player holds his / her hand within the detection range AR13 and each of the touch sensors 57A and 57C detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding his / her hand, and the player has an operation other than the detection range AR13. If the player holds his hand over the area and only one of the touch sensors 57A and 57C detects this, or if both the touch sensors 57A and 57C do not detect this, the player has not held his hand. judge.
By determining that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both the touch sensors 57A and 57C have detected the operation of the player in this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like.

Next, the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR21 which is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B will be described.
FIG. 75A is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the origin position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR3 of the touch sensors 57A to 57C. In the example shown in FIG. 75A, the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR21 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B are not overlapped in a plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75A, the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR13 of the touch sensors 57A and 57C are not overlapped in a plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57C.

FIG. 75B is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the maximum point position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR3 of the touch sensors 57A to 57C. In the example shown in FIG. 75 (b), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR21 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B are in a state of overlapping in a plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is the position where the first accessory 310 is detected by the detection sensor including the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75B, the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection ranges AR13 of the touch sensors 57A and 57C are not overlapped in a plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57C.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical method, the action of the player holding his / her hand over the detection range AR 21 can be detected through the window panel 22. Therefore, in a state where the detection range is the overlapping portion (detection range AR21) between the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B, the first accessory 310 is detected, so countermeasures are required. Become. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the present embodiment, during the operation of the first accessory 310, the player operates in the detection range AR21 by the touch sensors 57A and 57B that overlap with the operation range of the first accessory 310. The operation of the player in the detection range AR13 is detected by the touch sensors 57A and 57C that do not detect and do not overlap with the operating range of the first accessory 310.
As described above, as in the modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of touch sensors 57A to 57C are provided, and the detection state by the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the touch sensors 57A and 57C depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the first accessory 310. The detection state may be switched to prevent the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to the first accessory 310. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of touch sensors while preventing erroneous detection due to noise, and it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine 10.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has an operation receiving means (voice emission control device 90) having a plurality of detectors (touch sensors 57A to 57D) having different detection ranges for receiving the operation of the player, and an operation receiving means. A special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes a special effect according to the reception result in, and a movable accessory control means that controls the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310). (Voice emission control device 90, display control device 100). Then, the operation receiving means switches a detector that detects the player's operation so that the movable accessory does not fall within the operation range of the operation receiving means while the movable accessory controlling means is operating the movable accessory. It is characterized by.

According to the above configuration, the touch sensor can be suitably detected. Specifically, while the movable accessory is operating, the touch sensor that detects the player's operation is switched to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(2) The operation receiving means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has at least the first and second detectors, and the first detectors (touch sensors 57C and 57D) detect the operation of the player. The second detector (touch sensors 57A, 57B) has a first detection range in which the detection range to be detected does not overlap with the operation range of the movable accessory, and the detection range for detecting the operation of the player is the movable accessory. It has a second detection range that overlaps with the operation range, and the operation receiving means detects the operation of the player by the second detector while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory. It is characterized by the absence.

According to the above configuration, since the operation of the player is not detected by the second detector while the movable accessory is being operated, the touch sensor is prevented from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

(3) At least one of the first and second detectors of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is composed of a set of touch sensors, and the operation receiving means is at least one of the first and second detectors. When a player's operation is detected by a set of touch sensors provided in the above, it is recognized that the player's operation has been performed.

According to the above configuration, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when the set of touch sensors included in the first and second detectors detects the operation of the player, which is caused by noise or the like. False detection can be prevented. More specifically, when the player touches the peripheral part of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 with a momentum even though the player did not intend to operate it, or when the light from the outside of the window panel 22 is emitted. False detection due to reflection or the like can be prevented.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the music data (BGM) and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are individually stored in the common ROM 96 of the voice emission control device 90, and the music data used in the production MA to MC. (BGM) Separately from A to C, the voice data A to C of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are read out and output respectively. However, as described with reference to FIG. 48, the sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are heard during the output of the intro part of the music used in the staging MA to MC. Each is output. Therefore, the intro portion of the music data A to C may include the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. In the sixth embodiment, an embodiment in which the intro portion of the music data A to C includes the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Production data>
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing music data stored in the common ROM 96. In the present embodiment, as described above, the intro portion of each music data A to C includes voice data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. If you include a voice such as "Please hit right" in the intro part of the music, if you want to perform so-called loop processing, which is to return to the beginning and restart the output of the music after the music playback ends, "Right hit" A voice such as "Please" is output even during a loop (during the second and subsequent playbacks). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to include the intro portion in the loop processing.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the music data used in each of the staging MA to MC are divided into an intro part and other loop parts. It is stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96. More specifically, the music data A to C exclude the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data of only the intro part including the voice data such as "Please hit right", and the intro part. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data after the A-melody portion are divided and stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96.

Then, for example, when the music data A used in the production MA is looped, the MPU 92 reproduces the music data of the intro portion and then continuously reproduces the music data of the loop portion at the time of outputting the music for the first time, and loops. When the music data of the part is completed, a process of outputting the music data of the loop part again (hereinafter, also referred to as a loop process) is performed. By performing the same processing as above for the music data B and C used in the staging MB and MC, the voice such as "Please hit right" is played for the second time or later (loop) during the loop processing. It is prevented from being output even during processing).

The voice of "A RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data A is set so that the output of the voice of "A RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data A ends. ing. Further, the voice of "B RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data B is set so that the output of the voice of "B RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data B ends. ing. Further, the voice of "C RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data C is set so that the output of the voice of "C RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part of the music data C. ing.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 93, the music data A is associated with the effect MA, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 sets the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the music data A and output it from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the music data B and output it from the speaker unit 24 when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MB. do. Further, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the music data C and output it from the speaker unit 24 when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MC. do. More specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 based on the program and processing data stored in the ROM 93, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. .. The sound output LSI 95 outputs (reproduces) music data A to C from the speaker unit 24 based on the data set in the register 952.

Further, the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 store sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data D and E. The MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 as necessary and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the voice data D and E are speakers. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be output (reproduced) from the unit 24. Here, the voice data D is the voice of "right-handed" and the voice data E is the voice of "please right-handed". Here, the audio data D is associated with the staging MA, and the audio data E is associated with the staging MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 sets the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the audio data D and output it from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the audio data E and output it from the speaker unit 24 when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 46 is the effect MC. do.

<Transition process to staging MA>
Next, the transition process to the staging MA in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the staging MA of the present embodiment. In the transition process to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S4001 to S4006 as shown in FIG. 77.

In step S4001, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S4003 described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4002, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and outputs the music data A from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A is started from the speaker unit 24. Further, the intro part of the music data A includes the voice data of "A RUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW1) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data A, the voice "ARUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 in accordance with the intro portion of the music data A.

In step S4003, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S4001. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S4004. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data D “right-handed” from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the voice data D is set. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be output from the speaker unit 24. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "right-handed" is started from the speaker unit 24.

In step S4005, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data A from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105.

In step S4006, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data A has ended, and if the output of the music data A has ended, the MPU 92 corresponds to the loop portion (excluding the intro portion) of the music data A. The sequence data, parameter data and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the loop portion of the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 so that the sound output LSI 95 To control. Further, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data A when the output of the music data A is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S4003 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to staging MB>
Next, the transition process to the staging MB in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the staging MB of the present embodiment. In the transition process to the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S4101 to S4106 as shown in FIG. 78.

In step S4101, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S4103, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4102, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data B is output from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B is started from the speaker unit 24. Further, the intro part of the music data B includes the voice data of "BRUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW2) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data B, the voice "BRUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 in accordance with the intro portion of the music data B.

In step S4103, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S4101. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S4104. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. ..

In step S4105, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data B from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105.

In step S4106, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data B has been completed, and if the output of the music data B has been completed, the MPU 92 corresponds to the loop portion of the music data B (excluding the intro portion). The sequence data, parameter data and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the loop portion of the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 so that the sound output LSI 95 To control. Further, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data B when the output of the music data B is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S4103 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to staging MC>
Next, the transition process to the staging MC in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the staging MC of the present embodiment. In the transition process to the effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S4201 to S4206 as shown in FIG. 79.

In step S4201, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time in step S4203, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4202, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data C is output from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to be. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C is started from the speaker unit 24. Further, the intro part of the music data C includes the voice data of "C RUSH rush" and "Please hit right". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW3) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data C, the voice "C RUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 in accordance with the intro portion of the music data C, and the voice "C RUSH rush" is output. After the output, the voice of "Please hit right" is output (played).

In step S4203, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S4201. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts the striking navigation in step S4204. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. ..

In step S4205, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the video effect of the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1031. Based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls to read the video data C from the effect data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 105.

In step S4206, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data C has ended, and if the output of the music data C has ended, the MPU 92 corresponds to the loop portion (excluding the intro portion) of the music data C. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is output (reproduced) so that the loop portion of the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data C when the output of the music data C is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S4203 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the intro portion of the music data (BGM) A to C includes the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately store the music data and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) in the storage means (ROM93 and the common ROM96), and also "A RUSH rush" and "B RUSH rush". , It is not necessary to measure the time in order to take the timing to output the voice of "CRUSH rush". Therefore, the storage capacity of the storage means (ROM93 and the common ROM96) can be saved. In addition, the arithmetic processing of the MPU 92 can be reduced. Further, the player can recognize the gaming state by the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" included in the first data. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the expectation for the game can be improved. In addition, the data in the intro part that includes the audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" is not played repeatedly, and the data after the verse excluding the intro part is repeated. Since the data is reproduced, the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are repeatedly played back, and the player does not feel annoyed. Other effects are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the above embodiment, the transition process to each effect MA to MC has been described assuming that the effect types of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are the effect MA, MB, and MC, but the fourth mode M4 The type of effect is not limited to the above three types, and may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four or more types.

Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the intro portion of the music is reproduced at the time of transition to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is described, but the application of the present invention is limited to the transition to the fourth mode M4. It can be applied to all mode transitions with music changes.

[7th Embodiment]
In the above embodiment, the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 95, and the common ROM 96 are mounted on the voice emission control board 91 of the voice emission control device 90. In the first and sixth embodiments, the MPU 92 determines the content of the effect for a predetermined period based on the command received from the main control device 60, and performs light emission control to the various lamp units according to the content. It has a function. Further, the MPU 92 gives a sound output instruction to the sound output LSI 95 according to the content of the determined effect, and causes the sound output LSI 95 to control the sound output from the speaker unit 24.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the sound emission control board 91 is provided with a sound light SOC (System On a Chip) 97 and a sound light ROM 98. For the sound / light SOC 97, a control core 971 that determines the execution content of the effect according to the command received from the main control device and controls the light emission of the indicator lamp device 23 according to the determined effect content, and the control core 971 are determined. From the sound output core 972 that controls the sound output of the speaker unit 24 according to the content of the effect, and the data transfer unit 971c of the address data and sound output core 972 transmitted from the data transfer unit (DMA: Direct Memory Access) 972c of the control core 971. It has a built-in memory controller 974 that reads data from the sound / light ROM 98 according to the transmitted address data. In this case, the sound output core 972 has priority over the control core 971 when reading data.

<Electrical configuration related to production execution control>
Hereinafter, an electrical configuration for controlling the execution of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 80. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

A voice emission control device 90 is provided as a control device for controlling the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 60. As shown in FIG. 80, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91 on which a SOC 97 for sound light, a ROM 98 for sound light, and an amplifier circuit 99 are mounted. The sound / light SOC 97 includes a control core 971, a sound output core 972, a sound data processing unit 973, and a memory controller 974, and the sound / light SOC 97 is configured by integrating each of these elements into one chip.

The control core 971 determines the specific content of the effect based on the command received from the main control device 60, and executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp device 23 according to the determined content. Further, the control core 971 sets data according to the content of the determined effect to the register 972a provided in the sound output core 972, and issues a command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 100. Send to. As a result, the sound output core 972 executes sound output control in a manner in accordance with the contents instructed by the control core 971, and the display control device 100 performs display control in a manner in accordance with the contents instructed by the control core 971. Run. Incidentally, the data setting for the register 972a of the sound output core 972 by the control core 971 is performed through the data bus SL that electrically connects the control core 971 and the sound output core 972 in the sound light SOC 97. The control core 971 and the sound output core 972 can be bidirectionally communicated with each other through the data bus SL, and the data is set from the control core 971 to the sound output core 972 as described above, and the sound output core is set. A signal indicating that sound output is being performed is transmitted from 972 to the control core 971.

The control core 971 is used for reading program data and control data stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 98 in addition to the CPU 971a, which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, and executes a program. A RAM 971b for temporarily storing necessary data is built in. The RAM 971b is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared with the data capacity of, the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound / light ROM 98. The data capacity of the RAM 971b has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound / light ROM 98. However, the data capacity of the RAM 971b is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as it can be suitably controlled by the control core 971.

Further, the control core 971 also has a built-in data transfer unit 971c that gives an instruction to read data from the sound / light ROM 98 to the memory controller 974 based on the instruction from the CPU 971a. When the data corresponding to the data read instruction is written to the internal register of the data transfer unit 971c by the CPU 971a, the data transfer unit 971c informs the memory controller 974 until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read to the RAM 971b. And sends the address data for data read instruction. The transmission of this address data is performed in synchronization with the clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit built in the data transfer unit 971c (for example, 4 MHz).

The sound output core 972 executes the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 according to the content of the effect determined by the control core 971. The sound output core 972 contains a register 972a, an HWD972b, an SCM972d, and a data transfer unit 972c.

The register 972a has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output core 972, and can be used for both reading and writing a memory that requires external power supply for storage retention. It is configured to be used. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound / light ROM 98. The register 972a has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound / light ROM 98 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 971b of the control core 971. However, the data capacity of the register 972a is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the sound output core 972 can be suitably controlled.

The HWD 972b and SCM972d have a function of creating digital musical tone data by using the sound data transmitted from the control core 971 and stored in the register 972a and read from the sound / light ROM 98 according to the sequence data and the parameter data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing. There is. These sequence data and parameter data are set as a pair of data corresponding to each other, and a series of sound output is possible by using these pair of sequence data and parameter data. Further, the period of sound output defined by one set of sequence data and parameter data is constant at a specific time regardless of the type of sequence data and parameter data, for example, one game round or one open / close execution. It is 2.1 sec, which is shorter than the mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Further, the configuration may be a series of melody components, and in this case, the period of sound output determined by the sequence data and the parameter data varies depending on the type of the data.

The HWD972b creates digital music sound data in order to reproduce pre-sampled recording data, and by creating sinusoidal data using the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 98. , Enables playback of recorded data. The recorded data may be compressed data such as MP3 or uncompressed data. The SCM972d does not create digital music data from recorded data for a predetermined time, but creates digital music data by combining square wave data stored in advance in the sound light ROM 98 in chronological order, thereby creating electronic music data. It enables reproduction of sound (so-called pico-pico sound).

Here, the configuration of the register 972a used for creating digital musical tone data in the HWD 972b and the SCM 972d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81. The register 972a is provided with a sequence area 111, a parameter area 112, an HWD area 113, and an SCM area 114. The sequence data already described is written in the sequence area 111, and the parameter data already described is written in the parameter area 112.

The HWD 972b reads the recording data stored in the sound / light ROM 98 into the HWD area 113 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112, and records the recording data. By creating digital music sound data from the data, it is possible to output the recorded sound. The HWD area 113 is provided with the first CH area 113a to the 16th CH area 113p, and it is possible to create digital musical tone data based on different recording data in each CH area 113a to 143p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recording data.

The SCM972d reads the square wave data stored in the sound / light ROM 98 into the SCM area 114 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112, and the square wave data thereof. Electronic sound can be output by creating digital music sound data from wave data. The SCM area 114 is provided with the first CH area 114a to the 16th CH area 114p, and different digital musical tone data can be created in each CH area 114a to 144p. This makes it possible to output a plurality of different electronic sounds at the same time.

The 1st CH area 113a to 16th CH area 113p of the HWD area 113 and the 1st CH area 114a to 16th CH area 114p of the SCM area 114 each have an area that can store two created digital musical tone data. It is provided, and while sound output control is being performed using digital musical tone data created in one of the memorable areas, digital corresponding to the next execution period with respect to the execution period of the sound output control. Musical tone data is created in the other memorable area. As a result, it is possible to continuously create the digital musical tone data required for the next sound output control execution period while outputting the sound, and it is possible to continuously output the sound.

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, the sound data processing unit 973 of the SOC97 for sound and light has a function as a digital / analog converter, and the digital music data and the SCM area created in the HWD area 113 of the register 972a. The digital music sound data created in 114 is converted into an analog sound signal and output to the amplifier circuit 99 formed on the display control board 101. The amplifier circuit 99 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the amplified sound signal to the speaker unit 24. As a result, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker unit 24. Further, when digital music data is simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas 113a to 143p in the HWD area 113, the sound data processing unit 973 synthesizes the digital music data and also in the SCM area 114. When digital music sound data is simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas 114a to 144p, the digital music sound data is combined. When digital musical tone data is created in each of the HWD area 113 and the SCM area 114, the digital musical tone data are combined. When the synthesis is performed in this way, the digitally synthesized musical tone data after the synthesis is converted into an analog sound signal, amplified by the amplifier circuit 99 as described above, and then output to the speaker unit 24. This makes it possible to simultaneously output a plurality of different sounds from the speaker unit 24.

As described above, when the sound is output, the sound data, which is either the recorded data or the rectangular wave data, is read from the sound / light ROM 98 to the register 972a, but the sound data is read out to the sequence area 111 of the register 972a. It is performed by the data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972 based on the stored sequence data.

More specifically, the sequence data SD is defined with pointer data set in accordance with the processing timing of the sound output core 972, which is specifically described by using the explanatory diagram of FIG. 82 showing an example of the sequence data. , The content data of the sound output and the content data of the data transfer are defined corresponding to each pointer data. The processing timing of the sound output core 972 is generated in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit (not shown) built in the sound output core 972. In this case, the period of the clock signal is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 972c, specifically, it is 10 MHz. When the processing timing of the sound output core 972 comes, each of the HWD 972b, the SCM 972d, and the data transfer unit 972c performs an operation corresponding to the sequence data and the parameter data.

The content data of the sound output in the sequence data SD is used in HWD972b and SCM972d to create digital musical tone data for each channel. In this case, the content data of the sound output is set corresponding to the pointer data, and the creation of the digital music sound data based on the content data of the sound output set corresponding to each pointer data is transferred to the register 972a in advance. It is performed using the sound data that has been created.

The content data of the data transfer in the sequence data SD is used in the data transfer unit 972c to specify the data read timing from the sound / light ROM 98, and is in the area of the sound / light ROM 98 in which the data to be read is stored. Used to identify address data. Data of data transfer Data so that there are a plurality of predetermined pointer data between the read timing of the sound data corresponding to one channel and the read timing of the sound data corresponding to the next channel. Read instruction data is set. In the data of the data read instruction of 1, data for reading the sound data of the data amount capable of outputting the sound for a predetermined time is set, and the sound data is 1 for any of HWD972b and SCM972d. It supports individual channels. Therefore, when a plurality of digital musical tone data are combined and the sound is output, data reading instructions for the number of the digital musical tone data are given. Further, the sound data read based on the data read instruction of 1 corresponds to the data that enables sound output over 700 μsec as the predetermined time in the corresponding channel. In this case, HWD972b and SCM972d each have 16 channels, and the time required to read 700 μsec of sound data for all of these 16 channels is shorter than 700 μsec. This makes it possible to create digital musical tone data that enables continuous output of sound for the next predetermined time for the predetermined time while outputting sound for the predetermined time.

Data is read from the common sound / light ROM 98 by each of the data transfer unit 971c of the control core 971 and the data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972. The sound and light ROM 98 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. Specifically, although the NOR type flash memory is used as the sound / light ROM 98, a NAND type flash memory may be used. The sound and light ROM 98 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processing according to the programs.

The data structure of the sound and light ROM 98 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 83. In the sound / light ROM 98, program data (1), program data (2), ..., Program data (L) for executing a process for effect control by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 are stored in advance. It is remembered. By using these program data, the CPU 971a executes main processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the processing data (1), the processing data (2), ..., And the processing data (M) are stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 98. These processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output core 972. Further, the command data (1), the command data (2), ..., And the command data (N) are stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 98. These command data are used in the CPU 971a of the control core 971 to instruct the display control device 100 of the effect content.

In the sound / light ROM 98, in addition to the data used for executing the processing by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 as described above, the light emission data (1), the light emission data (2), ..., The light emission data (P) is stored, and sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., Sound data (Q) are stored. Information on the type of light emitting unit to be lit by the indicator lamp device 23, the lighting period, and the lighting order is set in each light emission data during a predetermined effect period, and the contents of these light emission patterns are each light emission. It depends on the type of data. Each light emission data stored in the sound light ROM 98 has a different light emission control period, and the content of the light emission pattern is different. Further, each sound data includes a recorded data composed of a sine wave, and also includes a square wave data used for outputting an electronic sound.
As shown in FIG. 80, the sound / light ROM 98 is electrically connected to the memory controller 974 of the sound / light SOC 97 via the address bus SL1 and the data bus SL2. The memory controller 974 is electrically connected to the control core 971 via the address bus SL3 and the data bus SL4, and is also electrically connected to the sound output core 972 via the address bus SL5 and the data bus SL6. ..

The address data of the read instruction target is transmitted to the memory controller 974 from the data transfer unit 971c of the control core 971 via the address bus SL3. The memory controller 974 includes a control side address buffer 974a for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 971c, and newly addresses data from the data transfer unit 971c in a situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored. Is received, the address data is stored in the control side address buffer 974a. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer unit 971c via the data bus SL4, whereby the data transfer unit 971c normally receives the address data. It is identified that it was done. On the other hand, when the unprocessed address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 971c in the situation where the unprocessed address data is stored in the control side address buffer 974a, the address data is not stored in the control side address buffer 974a. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 971c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 971c needs to transmit the same address data again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 971c, the memory controller 974 transmits the address data via the address bus SL1 to the sound / optical ROM 98, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. Is received from the sound / light ROM 98. Then, the received data is transmitted to the internal register of the RAM 971b of the control core 971 or the CPU 971a via the data bus SL4.

The address data to be read is transmitted from the data transfer unit 972c of the sound output core 972 to the memory controller 974 via the address bus SL5. The memory controller 974 includes a sound output side address buffer 974b for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 972c, and is newly addressed from the data transfer unit 972c in a situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored. When the data is received, the address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer unit 972c via the data bus SL6, whereby the data transfer unit 972c normally receives the address data. It is identified that it was done. On the other hand, when the unprocessed address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 972c in the situation where the unprocessed address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b, the address data is not stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 972c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 972c needs to transmit the same address data again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 972c, the memory controller 974 transmits the address data to the sound / optical ROM 98 via the address bus SL1, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. Is received from the sound / light ROM 98. Then, the received data is transmitted to the register 972a of the sound output core 972 via the data bus SL6.

A clock circuit is built in the memory controller 974, and the processing in the memory controller 974 is performed in synchronization with the clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit. In this case, the cycle of the clock signal is shorter than the cycle of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 972c and the cycle of the clock signal of the sound output core 972, specifically 15 MHz.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the features of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. The combination of each feature, such as deformation and improvement within the range in which the object can be achieved, is included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
An operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, voice emission control device 90) that accepts the player's operation, and
A special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and
A movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310) is provided.
The movable accessory control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation of the movable accessory is stopped during the operation acceptance period of the player.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group
It is possible to suitably detect the touch sensor. Specifically, by not operating the movable accessory while the player's operation is being accepted by the operation reception means, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the movable accessory and prevent the player from performing unintended control. .. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The operation receiving means is
When accepting the operation of the player, information indicating that the operation acceptance period of the player is in progress is stored in the operation reception status storage unit (various flag storage areas).
The movable accessory control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation of the movable accessory is stopped during the operation acceptance period of the player with reference to the operation reception state storage unit.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group
The operation reception means stores information indicating that the player is in the operation reception period in the operation reception status storage unit, and the movable accessory control means refers to the operation reception status storage unit to receive the operation of the player. Since it is determined whether or not it is during the period, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to a movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration of only confirming the presence or absence of a flag. In addition, since it is not necessary to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the player is in the operation acceptance period, it is possible to implement a function to prevent the operation acceptance means from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. can.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The operation receiving means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operation acceptance period of the player ends, the information indicating that the operation acceptance period of the player is being stored stored in the operation acceptance state storage unit is cleared.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group
When the operation reception period of the player ends, the operation reception means clears the information indicating that the operation reception period of the player is being stored stored in the operation reception status storage unit, so that after the operation reception period of the player ends, the operation reception means clears the information. A movable accessory can be operated to produce an effect. For this reason, the player can enjoy the production by the movable character, and the taste is improved.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine comprising: an operation reception notification means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for notifying that the player's operation is being received by the operation reception means.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group
Since the player is notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's preference is improved.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A4 of the present invention group,
The operation reception notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that it randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is receiving the operation of the player.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group
Since the player is randomly notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special effect may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is an expectation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A5 of the present invention group.
The special effect executing means is an expected effect that makes the player expect that when the operation receiving means receives the operation of the player, the gaming state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized by executing a notice production).

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group
The special effect executing means provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when the operation receiving means accepts the player's operation. Since it is executed, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group.
A determination means (MPU92) for determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means is completed within a predetermined time is provided.
The special effect execution means is
When the operation of the movable accessory is completed within a predetermined time, the special effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory is completed without canceling the execution of the special effect.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group
There is usually a time (time lag) of about 1 to several sec from the time when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 until the player performs the touch operation, but as in the feature A7 of the present invention group. , It is determined whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means is completed within the predetermined time, and if the operation of the movable accessory is completed within the predetermined time, the execution of the special effect is not canceled. By executing the special effect after the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the number of times the occurrence of the special effect is canceled can be reduced, and the special effect can be performed as many times as possible. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will be bored and to enhance the interest in the game, and it is possible to continue the game.

According to such a feature A group of the present invention, by not operating the movable accessory during the reception of the player's operation by the work reception means, the malfunction due to the movable accessory is prevented, and the player's unintended control is performed. Since it is possible to suppress the problem, the following problems can be solved.

A gaming machine provided with an operating means such as a touch sensor that receives an input by being operated by a player is known. For example, a conventional gaming machine is suggested to hold the player's hand over the symbol display device, and by detecting this with a touch sensor, a specific control state (a large number of gaming balls) advantageous to the player is achieved. There is something that performs an expected effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the payout state).

However, in recent gaming machines, a movable accessory is arranged around the symbol display device, and the touch sensor reacts to the movable accessory depending on the movable timing and movable range of the movable accessory, which is not intended by the player. There is a risk that production and control will be performed.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
An operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, voice emission control device 90) that accepts the player's operation, and
A special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and
A movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310) is provided.
The special effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the special effect is not executed while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group
It is possible to suitably detect the touch sensor. Specifically, by not executing the special effect during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the movable accessory and prevent the player from performing unintended control. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
When operating the movable accessory, information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation is stored in the operation state storage unit (various flag storage areas).
The special effect execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the special effect is not executed when the movable accessory is in operation with reference to the operation state storage unit.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group
The movable accessory control means stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in the operation state storage unit, and the special effect executing means refers to the operation state storage unit and the movable accessory is in operation. Since it is determined whether or not there is a flag, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to a movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration of only confirming the presence or absence of a flag. Further, since it is not necessary to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function of preventing the operation receiving means from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. ..

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the information indicating that the movable accessory stored in the operation state storage unit is in operation is cleared.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group
When the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the movable accessory control means clears the information indicating that the movable accessory stored in the operation state storage unit is in operation, so that a special effect is produced after the operation of the movable accessory is completed. Can be executed. For this reason, the player can enjoy the special production and the taste is improved.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine comprising: an operation reception notification means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for notifying that the player's operation is being received by the operation reception means.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group
Since the player is notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's preference is improved.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B4 of the present invention group,
The operation reception notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that it randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is receiving the operation of the player.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group
Since the player is randomly notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special effect may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is an expectation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B5 of the present invention group.
The special effect executing means is an expected effect that makes the player expect that when the operation receiving means receives the operation of the player, the gaming state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized by executing a notice production).

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group
The special effect executing means provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when the operation receiving means accepts the player's operation. Since it is executed, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B6 of the present invention group,
The special effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the movable accessory is in operation, a lottery for whether or not to perform the expected effect is not performed.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group
Since the special effect executing means does not draw a lottery as to whether or not to perform the expected effect when the movable accessory is in operation, the resources of the special effect executing means can be allocated to other uses, and the MPU can be used. Utilization efficiency is improved.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B7 of the present invention group.
A determination means (MPU92) for determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means is completed within a predetermined time is provided.
The special effect execution means is
When the operation of the movable accessory is completed within a predetermined time, the special effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory is completed without canceling the execution of the special effect.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group
There is usually a time (time lag) of about 1 to several sec from the time when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 until the player performs the touch operation, but as in the feature B8 of the present invention group. , It is determined whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means is completed within the predetermined time, and if the operation of the movable accessory is completed within the predetermined time, the execution of the special effect is not canceled. By executing the special effect after the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the number of times the occurrence of the special effect is canceled can be reduced, and the special effect can be performed as many times as possible. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will be bored and to enhance the interest in the game, and it is possible to continue the game.

According to the feature B group of the present invention, by not executing the special effect during the operation period of the movable accessory, the malfunction due to the movable accessory is prevented and the player's unintended control is suppressed. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

A gaming machine provided with an operating means such as a touch sensor that receives an input by being operated by a player is known. For example, a conventional gaming machine is suggested to hold the player's hand over the symbol display device, and by detecting this with a touch sensor, a specific control state (a large number of gaming balls) advantageous to the player is achieved. There is something that performs an expected effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the payout state).

However, in recent gaming machines, a movable accessory is arranged around the symbol display device, and the touch sensor reacts to the movable accessory depending on the movable timing and movable range of the movable accessory, which is not intended by the player. There is a possibility that the effect or control may be performed, and in such a case, dissatisfaction arises due to the execution of the control that the player does not want, for example, the effect.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1.
An operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, voice emission control device 90) that accepts the player's operation, and
A special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and
A movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310) is provided.
The operation receiving means is a gaming machine characterized in that it does not accept an operation by a player while the movable accessory controlling means is operating the movable accessory.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group
It is possible to suitably detect the touch sensor. Specifically, by not accepting the operation by the player during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent the malfunction due to the movable accessory and prevent the player from performing unintended control. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The operation receiving means is
A detector (touch sensor 57) for detecting the operation of the player is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the detection result output from the detector is ignored while the movable accessory control means operates the movable accessory.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group
Since the operation receiving means ignores the detection result output from the detector that detects the operation of the player during the operation of the movable accessory, the malfunction due to the movable accessory is prevented and the player's unintended control is performed. It can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
When operating the movable accessory, information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation is stored in the operation state storage unit (various flag storage areas).
The operation receiving means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the detection result from the detector is ignored when the movable accessory is in operation with reference to the operation state storage unit.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group
Information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation is stored in the operation state storage unit, and the special effect executing means refers to the operation state storage unit to determine whether the movable accessory is in operation. With a simple configuration that only confirms the presence or absence of a flag, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to a movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function of preventing the operation receiving means from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. ..

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the information indicating that the movable accessory stored in the operation state storage unit is in operation is cleared.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group
When the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the movable accessory control means clears the information indicating that the movable accessory stored in the operation state storage unit is in operation. Therefore, after the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the player It is possible to accept the operation of and execute a special effect. For this reason, the player can enjoy the special production and the taste is improved.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine comprising: an operation reception notification means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for notifying that the player's operation is being received by the operation reception means.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group
Since the player is notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's preference is improved.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C5 of the present invention group,
The operation reception notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that it randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is receiving the operation of the player.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group
Since the player is randomly notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special effect may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is an expectation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group.
The special effect executing means is an expected effect that makes the player expect that when the operation receiving means receives the operation of the player, the gaming state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized by executing a notice production).

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group
The special effect executing means provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when the operation receiving means accepts the player's operation. Since it is executed, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C7 of the present invention group.
A determination means (MPU92) for determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means is completed within a predetermined time is provided.
The special effect execution means is
When the operation of the movable accessory is completed within a predetermined time, the special effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory is completed without canceling the execution of the special effect.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group
There is usually a time (time lag) of about 1 to several sec from the time when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 until the player performs the touch operation, but as in the feature C8 of the present invention group. , It is determined whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means is completed within the predetermined time, and if the operation of the movable accessory is completed within the predetermined time, the execution of the special effect is not canceled. By executing the special effect after the operation of the movable accessory is completed, the number of times the occurrence of the special effect is canceled can be reduced, and the special effect can be performed as many times as possible. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will be bored and to enhance the interest in the game, and it is possible to continue the game.

According to the feature C group of the present invention, by not accepting the operation by the player during the operation period of the movable accessory, the malfunction due to the movable accessory is prevented and the control unintentional by the player is performed. Can be suppressed, so the following problems can be solved.

A gaming machine provided with an operating means such as a touch sensor that receives an input by being operated by a player is known. For example, a conventional gaming machine is suggested to hold the player's hand over the symbol display device, and by detecting this with a touch sensor, a specific control state (a large number of gaming balls) advantageous to the player is achieved. There is something that performs an expected effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the payout state).

However, in recent gaming machines, a movable accessory is arranged around the symbol display device, and the touch sensor reacts to the movable accessory depending on the movable timing and movable range of the movable accessory, which is not intended by the player. There is a possibility that the effect or control may be performed, and in such a case, dissatisfaction arises due to the execution of the control that the player does not want, for example, the effect.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1.
An operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, voice emission control device 90) that accepts the player's operation, and
A special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and
A movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310) is provided.
The operation receiving means is
While the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory, the detection range of the player's operation is changed so that the movable accessory is not within the operation of the operation receiving means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group
It is possible to suitably detect the touch sensor. Specifically, while the movable accessory is operating, the detection range of the touch sensor is changed to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The operation receiving means is
A first detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player does not overlap with the operation range of the movable accessory, and a second detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player overlaps with the operation range of the movable accessory. The game is characterized in that the operation of the player within the second detection range is not detected while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory. Machine.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group
While the movable accessory is being operated, the operation of the player within the second detection range where the detection range for detecting the player's operation overlaps with the operation range of the movable accessory is not detected, so that the movable accessory is used. Prevent malfunction of the touch sensor. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine comprising a detection range switching means for switching the first and second detection ranges by changing the position or orientation of the operation receiving means.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group
Since the detection range is switched by changing the position or orientation of the operation reception means, the detection range can be switched by one operation reception means.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The operation receiving means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a detection range switching means for switching the first and second detection ranges by rotating an operation receiving means.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group
By rotating the operation receiving means, the detection range is switched without moving the position of the operating means, so that the space for installing the operation receiving means can be reduced.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D2 to D4 of the present invention group.
The special effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different special effects are executed depending on whether or not the player's operation is accepted in any of the first and second detection ranges.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group
Since different special effects are executed depending on which detection range the player's operation is accepted, the player can enjoy different expected effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D5 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine including an operation position suggestion means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) that suggests a detection range of the player's operation by the operation reception means.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group
Since the detection range of the player's operation by the operation reception means is suggested, the player can be made to recognize the detection range of the operation reception means, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D6 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine including an operation reception notification means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for notifying the player that an operation is being received.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group
Since the player is notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's preference is improved.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D7 of the present invention group,
The operation reception notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that it randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is receiving the operation of the player.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group
Since the player is randomly notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special effect may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is an expectation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D8 of the present invention group.
The special effect executing means is an expected effect that makes the player expect that when the operation receiving means receives the operation of the player, the gaming state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized by executing a notice production).

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group
The special effect executing means provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when the operation receiving means accepts the player's operation. Since it is executed, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

According to the feature D group of the present invention, the detection range of the touch sensor is changed while the movable accessory is operating to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory, which is not intended by the player. Since it is possible to suppress the control from being performed, the following problems can be solved.

A gaming machine provided with an operating means such as a touch sensor that receives an input by being operated by a player is known. For example, a conventional gaming machine is suggested to hold the player's hand over the symbol display device, and by detecting this with a touch sensor, a specific control state (a large number of gaming balls) advantageous to the player is achieved. There is something that performs an expected effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the payout state).

However, in recent gaming machines, a movable accessory is arranged around the symbol display device, and the touch sensor reacts to the movable accessory depending on the movable timing and movable range of the movable accessory, which is not intended by the player. There is a possibility that the effect or control may be performed, and in such a case, dissatisfaction arises due to the execution of the control that the player does not want, for example, the effect.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1.
An operation receiving means (voice emission control device 90) having a plurality of detectors (touch sensors 57A to 57D) having different detection ranges for receiving the operation of the player, and
A special effect executing means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) that executes a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and
A movable accessory control means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory (first accessory 310) is provided.
The operation receiving means is
While the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory, the detector that detects the player's operation is switched so that the movable accessory does not fall within the operation range of the operation reception means. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group
It is possible to suitably detect the touch sensor. Specifically, while the movable accessory is operating, the touch sensor that detects the player's operation is switched to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
The operation receiving means is
It has at least the first and second detectors and
The first detector (touch sensors 57C, 57D) has a first detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player does not overlap with the operation range of the movable accessory.
The second detector (touch sensors 57A, 57B) has a second detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player overlaps with the operation range of the movable accessory.
The operation receiving means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation of the player is not detected by the second detector while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group
Since the operation of the player is not detected by the second detector while the movable accessory is being operated, the touch sensor is prevented from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's preference from being reduced due to the execution of the effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game without feeling dissatisfied with the undesired control, for example, the execution of the effect, and the satisfaction of the player is improved.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group,
At least one of the first and second detectors is composed of a set of touch sensors.
The operation receiving means is
A game characterized in that when an operation of the player is detected by the set of touch sensors included in at least one of the first and second detectors, it is recognized that the operation by the player has been performed. Machine.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group
False detection due to noise or the like is detected by determining that the player has performed an operation of holding his / her hand only when a set of touch sensors provided in at least one of the first and second detectors detects the player's operation. Can be prevented. More specifically, when the player touches the peripheral part of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 with a momentum even though the player did not intend to operate it, or when the light from the outside of the window panel 22 is emitted. False detection due to reflection or the like can be prevented.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
The first and second detectors are each composed of a set of touch sensors.
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the set of touch sensors constituting the first and second detectors is commonly used in the first and second detectors.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group
Since one of the plurality of touch sensors constituting the first and second detectors is commonly used, the number of touch sensors can be reduced while preventing erroneous detection due to noise, and the game machine 10 Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E2 to E4 of the present invention group.
The special effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different special effects are executed depending on which of the first and second detection ranges the player's operation is accepted.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group
Since different special effects are executed depending on which detection range the player's operation is accepted, the player can enjoy different expected effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E5 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine including an operation position suggestion means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) that suggests a detection range of the player's operation by the operation reception means.

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group
Since the detection range of the player's operation by the operation reception means is suggested, the player can be made to recognize the detection range of the operation reception means, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E6 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine including an operation reception notification means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100) for notifying the player that an operation is being received.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group
Since the player is notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's preference is improved.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E7 of the present invention group,
The operation reception notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that it randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is receiving the operation of the player.

According to the feature E8 of the present invention group
Since the player is randomly notified that the operation of the player is being accepted, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special effect may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is an expectation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E8 of the present invention group.
The special effect executing means is an expected effect that makes the player expect that when the operation receiving means receives the operation of the player, the gaming state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized by executing a notice production).

According to the feature E9 of the present invention group
The special effect executing means provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when the operation receiving means accepts the player's operation. Since it is executed, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, while the movable accessory is operating, the touch sensor that detects the operation of the player is switched to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory, and the player. Since it is possible to suppress the unintended control of the above, the following problems can be solved.

A gaming machine provided with an operating means such as a touch sensor that receives an input by being operated by a player is known. For example, a conventional gaming machine is suggested to hold the player's hand over the symbol display device, and by detecting this with a touch sensor, a specific control state (a large number of gaming balls) advantageous to the player is achieved. There is something that performs an expected effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the payout state).

However, in recent gaming machines, a movable accessory is arranged around the symbol display device, and the touch sensor reacts to the movable accessory depending on the movable timing and movable range of the movable accessory, which is not intended by the player. There is a possibility that the effect or control may be performed, and in such a case, dissatisfaction arises due to the execution of the control that the player does not want, for example, the effect.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 28 ... Operation button, 36 ... 1st start port, 37 ... 2nd start port, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening and closing door, 38c ... Variable winning drive unit, 39 ... Out port, 51 ... Design display device, 57 ... Touch sensor, 60 ... Main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... Voice emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... MPU, 310 ... First role Object (movable accessory).

Claims (1)

The main control means to control the progress of the game,
A predetermined game area of a game board provided with an image display means for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern is variablely displayed, and a predetermined game area.
A detection means that is in a predetermined detection state when a predetermined object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the predetermined gaming area.
Movable members displaced between the first and second positions,
Displacement means for displacement of the movable member and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the image display means to execute a game effect in the progress of the game.
When the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the detection means can be in the predetermined detection state.
The effect executing means is
In the case of a predetermined displacement in which the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the displacement means, the movable member corresponds to the case before the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position . The first effect execution means capable of executing the first effect, and
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect when the presence of the predetermined object is detected by the detection means in the predetermined area during a predetermined game period is provided.
This gaming machine is
A determination means for determining the remaining time of the first effect is provided.
If the determination means determines that the remaining time of the first effect is longer than the predetermined time while the first effect is being executed, the predetermined game period is not generated and the remaining time of the first effect is the predetermined time. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined gaming period can be generated after the first effect is executed when the determination means is determined to be as follows .

Images